Standard Practice For Military Packaging

NOT MEASUREMENT
SENSITIVE
MIL-STD-2073-1D
15 December 1999
SUPERSEDING
MIL-STD-2073-1C
1 October 1996
DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE
STANDARD PRACTICE FOR
MILITARY PACKAGING
AMSC N7296
AREA PACK
MIL-STD-2073-1D
THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
ii
MIL-STD-2073-1D
FOREWORD
1. This standard is to be invoked only when procured items are expected to enter the
military distribution system. Other items are to be commercially packaged to the extent
practicable. Details and decision logic for the use of this standard are described in 1.1, 1.2, figure
1, and 4.1.
2. This military standard is approved for use by all Departments and Agencies of the
Department of Defense.
3. Beneficial comments (recommendations, additions, deletions) and any pertinent data
which may be of use in improving this document should be addressed to: Commander, Naval Air
Warfare Center Aircraft Division, Highway 547, Code 4.3.5E, Building 562-3, Lakehurst, New
Jersey 08733-5049, by using the Standardization Document Improvement Proposal (DD Form
1426) appearing at the end of this document or by letter.
iii
MIL-STD-2073-1D
CONTENTS
Paragraph
Page
1.
1.1
1.1.1
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
SCOPE ..................................................................................................1
Purpose .............................................................................................1
Definition ..........................................................................................1
Application........................................................................................1
Applicability ......................................................................................1
Non-applicability ...............................................................................1
2.
2.1
2.2
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.3
2.4
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................3

General..............................................................................................3
Government documents .....................................................................3
Specifications and standards ..............................................................3
Other Government documents, drawings and publications..................4
Non-Government publications ...........................................................5
Order of precedence ..........................................................................5
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
DEFINITIONS ......................................................................................6
General..............................................................................................6
Categorization ...................................................................................6
Common group items ........................................................................6
Consumable.......................................................................................6
Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS).......................................6
Critical items .....................................................................................6
Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) items .................................7
Fragility factor...................................................................................7
Hazardous material............................................................................7
Levels of protection...........................................................................7
Loads ................................................................................................8
Packaging design validation ...............................................................9
Prototype pack ..................................................................................9
Proper shipping name ........................................................................9
Repairable item..................................................................................9
Reusable container.............................................................................9
Sealed................................................................................................10
Selective group items.........................................................................10
Special group items ...........................................................................10
iv
MIL-STD-2073-1D
CONTENTS (Continued)
Paragraph
Page
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
GENERAL MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS...................10

General..............................................................................................10
Development of military packaging details and data requirements.......11
Packaging of classified items..............................................................11
Quantity per unit pack (QUP) ............................................................11
Containers .........................................................................................11
Kits ...................................................................................................11
Repairable excess and residual parts...................................................11
Loose fill materials.............................................................................11
Shock and vibration absorption..........................................................11
Determination of item fragility ...........................................................12
Packaging materials ...........................................................................12
5.
5.1
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.2.1
5.2.2.2
5.2.2.3
5.2.3
5.2.3.1
5.2.3.2
5.2.3.3
5.2.3.4
DETAILED MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS .................12

General military package design considerations..................................12
Military preservation..........................................................................12
Cleaning and drying ...........................................................................12
Preservatives .....................................................................................12
Preservative applicability....................................................................12
Application of contact preservatives...................................................12
Application and use criteria of volatile corrosion inhibitors (VCI) ......13
Methods of military preservation general requirements....................13
Surfaces coated with preservatives.....................................................15
Metal surfaces not coated with preservatives......................................15
Method 10 (formerly Method III) Physical protection .....................15
Method 20 (formerly Method I) Preservative coating only (with
greaseproof wrap, as required) ......................................................15
Method 30 (formerly Method IC) Waterproof or waterproofgreaseproof protection with preservative as required .....................15
Method 31 (formerly Submethod IC-3) Waterproof bag, sealed ......16
Method 32 (formerly Submethod IC-2) Container, waterproof
bag, sealed ....................................................................................16
Method 33 (formerly Submethod IC-1) Greaseproof-waterproof
bag, sealed ....................................................................................16
5.2.3.5
5.2.3.5.1
5.2.3.5.2
5.2.3.5.3
MIL-STD-2073-1D
Paragraph
5.2.3.6
5.2.3.6.1
5.2.3.6.2
5.2.3.6.3
5.2.3.6.4
5.2.3.6.5
5.2.3.7
5.2.3.7.1
5.2.3.7.2
5.2.3.7.3
5.2.3.7.4
5.2.3.7.5
5.2.4
5.2.4.1
5.2.4.2
5.2.4.3
5.2.4.4
5.2.4.5
5.2.4.6
5.2.4.7
5.2.4.8
5.3
Page
Method 40 (formerly Method IA) Watervaporproof protection
with preservative as required.........................................................16
Method 41 (formerly Submethod IA-8) Watervaporproof bag,
sealed............................................................................................16
Method 42 (formerly Submethod IA-14) Container, watervaporproof bag, sealed, container..................................................17
Method 43 (formerly Submethod IA-16) Floating watervaporproof bag, sealed ..................................................................17
Method 44 (formerly Submethod IA-13) Rigid container (other
than metal), sealed ........................................................................17
Method 45 (formerly Submethod IA-5) Rigid metal container,
sealed............................................................................................18
Method 50 (formerly Method II) Watervaporproof protection
with desiccant ...............................................................................18
Method 51 (formerly Submethod IIc) Watervaporproof bag,
sealed............................................................................................20
Method 52 (formerly Submethod IIb) Container, watervaporproof bag, sealed, container...........................................................20
Method 53 (formerly Submethod IIa) Floating watervaporproof
bag, sealed ....................................................................................21
Method 54 (formerly Submethod IIf) Rigid container (other
than metal), sealed ........................................................................21
Method 55 (formerly Submethod IId) Rigid metal container,
sealed............................................................................................21
Military preservation requirements for items with specific
characteristics ...............................................................................21
Electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) items...................................21
Items capable of disassembly..............................................................21
Flexible-coilable items........................................................................22
Wheeled items ...................................................................................22
Caging or damping ............................................................................22
Items with mounts .............................................................................22
Rubber and synthetic rubber items .....................................................22
Hazardous items ................................................................................22
Level A and B packing requirements..................................................22
vi
MIL-STD-2073-1D
Paragraph
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.3.2.1
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9.
Page
Intermediate containers......................................................................22
Exterior containers ............................................................................23
Container selection ............................................................................23
Minimal packing requirements ...........................................................23
Marking.............................................................................................23
Military packaging design validation provisions..................................23
Quality assurance provisions ..............................................................24
NOTES..................................................................................................24
Acquisition requirements ...................................................................24
Issue of DoDISS ...............................................................................24
Associated Data Item Descriptions (DIDs).........................................24
Testing facilities.................................................................................25
Changes in methods of preservation designations ...............................25
Subject term (keyword listing) ...........................................................26
Copies of regulations .........................................................................27
Supersession......................................................................................27
Changes from previous issue..............................................................27
FIGURES
Figure
1
Page
Military packaging requirements development decision chart ..................2
TABLES
Table
I
II
Page
Approximate fragility factors ..................................................................28
Method of preservation vs. unit container bag material cross reference
to MIL-B-117....................................................................................29
vii
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDICES
APPENDIX A
DEVELOPMENT OF MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS
Paragraph
Page
A.1
SCOPE ..................................................................................................30
A.2
A.2.1
A.2.2
A.2.2.1
A.2.2.2
A.2.3

General..............................................................................................30
A.3
A.3.1
USE OF EXISTING PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS ........................35

Application........................................................................................35
A.4
A.4.1
A.4.2
A.4.3
HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ..................................................................35

General..............................................................................................35
Hazardous material package testing ...................................................35
Hazardous material shipment documentation......................................35
A.5
A.5.1
A.5.2
A.5.3
A.5.3.1
A.5.3.2
A.5.3.2.1
A.5.3.2.1.1
A.5.3.2.1.2
A.5.3.2.1.3
A.5.3.2.2
A.5.3.2.3
A.5.4
A.5.5
A.5.6
MILITARY PACKAGING CODE DEVELOPMENT ...........................35

Item classification ..............................................................................35
Item characteristics............................................................................36
Categorization ...................................................................................36
Category code ...................................................................................36
Category code development...............................................................37
First category physical and chemical characteristics.........................37
Item composition/properties criteria...................................................37
Critical item criteria ...........................................................................37
Contact preservative criteria ..............................................................38
Second category weight/size/fragility ..............................................38
Third category preservatives ...........................................................38
Military packaging codes for common items ......................................38
Military packaging codes for selective items.......................................38
Recording of coded requirements.......................................................39
viii
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDICES (Continued)
APPENDIX A (Continued)
Paragraph
Page
A.6
CONTAINER SELECTION ..................................................................39
A.7
FORMULAS..........................................................................................39
A.8
A.8.1
A.8.2
PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION................................................39

Common items ..................................................................................39
Selective and special items .................................................................39
FIGURES
Figure
A.1
Page
Format for interpretation of packaging code sequence ............................40
TABLES
Table
A.I
A.II
A.III
A.IV
A.V
A.VI
Page
Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination..........41
Weight/size/and non-operational fragility category code
determination.....................................................................................47
Contact preservative category code determination ..................................48
Predetermined military packaging data for common items.......................53
Formulas for material weight and size calculations..................................57
Procedural packaging specifications........................................................60
APPENDIX B
FACTORS AND FORMULAE ESTABLISHING MILITARY PACKAGING QUP AND ICQ
Paragraph
B.1
Page
SCOPE ..................................................................................................62
ix
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX B (Continued)
Paragraph
Page
B.2
B.3
B.3.1
B.3.8.2
DETERMINATION OF QUP................................................................62
Repairable items (depot or field level) or items designated Hivalue or Hi-priority .......................................................................62
Consumable items..............................................................................62
Irregular configuration, delicate or fragile items .................................62
Pairs and sets items............................................................................62
Items unit packed in accordance with Method 50...............................62
Kit.....................................................................................................62
Lumber, raw stock, paints, oils and dope ...........................................63
Factors and formulae establishing QUP..............................................63
Consumable items having both maintenance and overhaul
applications...................................................................................63
Consumable items having overhaul applications only..........................63
B.4
B.4.1
B.4.2
QUANTITY PER UNIT PACK DETERMINATION FORMULAE ......65

Formula A .........................................................................................65
Formula B .........................................................................................66
B.5
B.5.1
B.5.2
DETERMINATION OF ICQ.................................................................67
Quantities per intermediate container .................................................67
Intermediate container limitations ......................................................67
B.3.2
B.3.3
B.3.4
B.3.5
B.3.6
B.3.7
B.3.8
B.3.8.1
TABLES
Table
B.I
Page
Guidance for establishing number of unit packs per intermediate
container ...........................................................................................68
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
CONTAINERS
Paragraph
Page
C.1
SCOPE ..................................................................................................69
C.2
C.2.1
C.2.2
C.2.2.1
C.2.3

General..............................................................................................69
Specifications, standards and drawings...............................................69
C.3
C.3.1
C.3.2
GENERAL ............................................................................................72
Unit container size .............................................................................72
Use of unit containers as shipping containers......................................72
C.4
C.4.1
C.4.2
EXPENDABLE CONTAINERS............................................................72
Interior containers .............................................................................72
Exterior containers ............................................................................72
C.5
C.5.1
C.5.1.1
C.5.1.2
C.5.1.3
C.5.2
C.5.2.1
C.5.2.2
C.5.2.3
C.5.2.4
C.5.2.5
C.5.2.6
C.5.2.7
C.5.2.7.1
C.5.2.7.2
C.5.2.7.3
REUSABLE CONTAINERS .................................................................73

Specialized containers........................................................................73
Design ...............................................................................................73
Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS).......................................73
Specialized shipping containers for ordnance......................................73
Multiapplication containers ................................................................73
Design and selection ..........................................................................73
Identification .....................................................................................73
Coded data ........................................................................................74
Packaging design validation ...............................................................74
Short life containers...........................................................................74
Long life containers ...........................................................................75
Multiapplication container availability ................................................76
General Services Administration (GSA) .............................................76
Naval Inventory Control Point (NAVICP) .........................................76
Commercial sources...........................................................................76
xi
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C (Continued)
TABLES
Table
C.I
C.II
C.III
C.IV
Page
Interior containers ..................................................................................77
Exterior shipping containers selection by maximum weight of
contents and level of packing .............................................................78
Fiberboard container size list ..................................................................81
Multiapplication container selection........................................................83
APPENDIX D
FOR KITS (PARTS AND MODIFICATION)
Paragraph
Page
D.1
SCOPE ..................................................................................................93
D.2
D.3
D.3.1
D.3.2
D.3.2.1
D.3.2.2
D.3.2.3
D.4
D.4.1
D.4.2
D.4.3
D.4.3.1
D.4.3.2
PRESERVATION .................................................................................93
Consolidation of different items within a method of preservation........93
Application of preservative compounds or oils ...................................94
Kits procured for oxygen equipment ..................................................94
Preservation procedures.....................................................................94
Items susceptible to corrosion (iron, steel, magnesium, etc.) ..............94
UNIT PRESERVATION .......................................................................94
Physical protection ............................................................................94
Segregation of items within packs......................................................94
Skin packaging ..................................................................................94
Skin packaging metals .......................................................................94
Skin packaging shims or gaskets ........................................................95
D.5
PACKING AND MARKING OF KITS..................................................95
xii
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
MILITARY PACKAGING DATA FORMS
Paragraph
Page
E.1
SCOPE ..................................................................................................96
E.2
E.2.1
E.2.2
E.2.2.1

General..............................................................................................96
Standards ..........................................................................................96
E.3
E.3.1
E.3.2
E.3.2.1
E.3.2.2
E.3.2.3
E.3.2.4
E.3.2.5
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..............................................................96
Development of military packaging data.............................................96
Recording military packaging data .....................................................97
Manual recording of data...................................................................97
National Stock Number (NSN) requirements .....................................97
Coded data ........................................................................................97
Kits (Parts and Modification).............................................................97
Special packaging instructions ...........................................................97
E.4
E.4.1
E.4.1.1
E.4.2
E.4.2.1
E.4.2.2
E.4.2.3
E.4.2.4
E.4.2.5
E.4.2.6
E.4.2.7
DETAILED REQUIREMENTS ............................................................97

Development of military packaging data.............................................97
Procedural specification data .............................................................98
Preparation of military packaging data ...............................................98
Nomenclature ....................................................................................98
Manufacturer's Commercial and Government Entity code and
part number ..................................................................................98
Configuration item (CI) .....................................................................98
Item identification data ......................................................................99
Preservation and packing data............................................................99
Supplemental data .............................................................................99
Special packaging instruction (SPI) data ............................................99
E.5
E.5.1
PREPARATION OF SPECIAL PACKAGING INSTRUCTION (SPI) ..99

General..............................................................................................99
xiii
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E (Continued)
Paragraph
E.5.2
E.5.2.1
E.5.2.2
E.5.2.2.1
E.5.2.2.2
E.5.2.2.3
E.5.2.2.3.1
E.5.2.2.3.2
E.5.2.2.3.3
E.5.2.2.3.4
E.5.2.2.4
E.5.2.2.5
E.5.2.2.6
E.5.2.3
E.5.2.4
E.6
E.6.1
E.6.1.1
E.6.1.2
E.6.1.3
E.6.1.4
E.6.1.5
E.6.1.5.1
E.6.1.6
E.6.2
E.6.2.1
E.6.2.2
E.6.2.2.1
E.6.2.3
Page
Format...............................................................................................100
SPI preparation instructions...............................................................100
Details of completion of SPI ..............................................................102
Additional information.......................................................................102
Details ...............................................................................................103
Materials ...........................................................................................103
Lumber and plywood.........................................................................103
Fiberboard .........................................................................................103
Isolation system.................................................................................103
Hardware ..........................................................................................103
Specification containers .....................................................................103
Trade names ......................................................................................104
Application of additional items...........................................................104
Styles ................................................................................................104
Variations in style and format ............................................................104
APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR DEVELOPED PACKAGING
DATA ...............................................................................................104
Procedures for submitting data for approval.......................................104
Approval of data without National Stock Numbers ............................105
Approval of data for emergency shipments.........................................105
Approval of data of interest to one DoD agency ................................105
Use of background data for approval .................................................105
Return of approved data ....................................................................105
Authentication ...................................................................................105
Data for common items......................................................................106
Transmittal of data.............................................................................106
Preservation and packing data............................................................106
Special packaging instructions ...........................................................106
Computerized format.........................................................................106
Method of transmission......................................................................106
xiv
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E (Continued)
TABLES
Table
E.I
E.II
E.III
E.IV
Page
Item identification data for PART A of DD Form 2326 ..........................107
Preservation Packing data for PART B of DD Form 2326 ...................110
Supplemental data for PART C of DD Form 2326..................................113
Special packaging instruction data for PART D of DD Form 2326 .........115
FIGURES
Figure
E.1
E.2
Page
Preservation and Packing Data ...............................................................116
Special Packaging Instruction.................................................................117
APPENDIX F
MILITARY PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION PROVISIONS
Paragraph
Page
F.1
SCOPE ..................................................................................................119
F.2
F.2.1
F.2.2
F.2.2.1
F.2.2.2
F.2.3

General..............................................................................................119
Standards ..........................................................................................119
Other Government documents ...........................................................119
F.3
F.3.1
F.3.2
F.3.3
GENERAL ............................................................................................121
Packaging design validation tests .......................................................121
Ammunition unit loads.......................................................................121
xv
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX F (Continued)
Paragraph
Page
F.4
F.4.1
F.4.2
TEST METHODS .................................................................................121

Container performance tests...............................................................121
Preservation tests...............................................................................121
F.5
F.5.1
OTHER .................................................................................................121
Acceptance criteria and disposition of test samples.............................121
APPENDIX G
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS
Paragraph
Page
G.1
SCOPE ..................................................................................................122
G.2
G.2.1
G.2.2
G.2.2.1

General..............................................................................................122
G.3
G.3.1
G.3.2
G.3.3
G.3.3.1
G.3.3.2
GENERAL ............................................................................................123
Quality system ...................................................................................123
Quality assurance requirements..........................................................123
Sampling ...........................................................................................123
Lot size .............................................................................................123
Sampling for inspection .....................................................................123
G.4
G.4.1
G.4.2
G.4.2.1
G.4.2.2
G.4.2.2.1
G.4.2.2.1.1
PRESERVATION INSPECTIONS........................................................123
Visual preservation examinations .......................................................123
Leakage test ......................................................................................123
Wetting agent ....................................................................................124
Selection of technique........................................................................124
Vacuum retention technique ..............................................................124
Sealed rigid container ........................................................................124
xvi
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX G (Continued)
Paragraph
G.4.2.2.1.2
G.4.2.2.2
G.4.2.2.3
G.4.2.2.4
G.4.2.2.5
G.4.3
G.4.3.1
G.4.3.1.1
G.4.3.2
G.5
G.5.1
Page
Sealed flexible bag .............................................................................124
Submersion (or immersion) technique ................................................125
Pneumatic pressure technique ............................................................125
Hot water technique ..........................................................................125
Squeeze technique (applicable only to flexible specimens) ..................125
Heat-sealed seam test ........................................................................125
Selection of samples for heat-sealed seam tests ..................................125
Alternate sampling procedure for heat-sealed seam test......................125
Performance of heat-sealed seam test.................................................126
PACKING INSPECTIONS....................................................................126
Examination procedures.....................................................................126
TABLES
Table
G.I
G.II
Page
Preservation inspection provisions ..........................................................127
Leakage and heat-sealed seam test provisions.........................................128
APPENDIX H
PROCEDURES FOR COMPLIANCE WITH CONTAINER DESIGN
RETRIEVAL SYSTEM (CDRS) REQUIREMENTS
Paragraph
Page
H.1
SCOPE ..................................................................................................129
H.2
H.3
H.3.1
H.3.2

Design search request submittal .........................................................129
CDRS/MO search response ...............................................................129
xvii
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX H (Continued)
Paragraph
H.3.3
H.3.3.1
H.3.3.1.1
H.3.3.2
H.3.3.2.1
H.3.3.2.2
Page
Design activity action on CDRS/MO response ...................................129
Negative response from CDRS/MO ...................................................130
Submittal of container design data .....................................................130
Positive response from CDRS/MO.....................................................130
Item (Inventory) manager notification................................................130
Container design agent notification ....................................................130
APPENDIX J
MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENT CODES
Paragraph
Page
J.1
SCOPE ..................................................................................................132
J.2
J.2.1
J.2.2
J.2.2.1
J.2.2.2
J.2.3

General..............................................................................................132
Specifications, standards and handbooks............................................132
J.3
J.3.1
J.3.2
J.3.2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS..............................................................138
Code system ......................................................................................138
Procedure and responsibilities for revisions ........................................138
Adding codes.....................................................................................139
J.4
J.4.1
J.4.2
J.4.2.1
J.4.3
J.4.4

General code requirements.................................................................139
Preservation methods.........................................................................139
Specialized preservation.....................................................................140
Quantity per unit pack .......................................................................140
Cleaning ............................................................................................140
xviii
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J (Continued)
Paragraph
J.4.5
J.4.6
J.4.7
J.4.8
J.4.9
J.4.9.1
J.4.10
J.4.11
J.4.12
J.4.12.1
J.4.13
J.4.14
J.5
J.5.1
Page
Preservative.......................................................................................140
Wrapping material .............................................................................140
Cushioning and dunnage ....................................................................140
Thickness of cushioning or dunnage...................................................140
Unit and intermediate container .........................................................140
Options..............................................................................................140
Unit container level and optional procedure indicator codes ...............140
Unit packs per intermediate container ................................................141
Intermediate container .......................................................................141
Intermediate container limitations ......................................................141
Packing .............................................................................................141
Special markings................................................................................141
CROSS INDEX .....................................................................................141
Document number to table and code ..................................................141
TABLES
Table
J.I
J.Ia
J.II
J.III
J.IIIa
J.IV
J.IVa
J.V
J.Va
J.VI
J.VII
J.VIIa
J.VIII
Page
Methods of preservation codes ...............................................................142
Specialized preservation codes ...............................................................143
Cleaning procedure codes.......................................................................149
Contact preservative material codes........................................................150
Contact preservative material codes in specification sequence.................152
Wrapping material codes ........................................................................154
Wrapping material codes in specification sequence .................................155
Cushioning and dunnage material codes..................................................156
Cushioning and dunnage material codes in specification sequence...........158
Thickness of cushioning or dunnage codes..............................................159
Unit and intermediate container codes ....................................................160
Unit and intermediate container codes in specification sequence..............166
Unit container level codes.......................................................................170
xix
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J (Continued)
TABLES (Continued)
Table
J.VIIIa
J.IX
J.IXa
J.X
J.XI
Page
Optional procedure indicator codes ........................................................171
Military packing requirement codes ........................................................172
Minimal packing requirement codes........................................................175
Special marking codes ............................................................................176
Document number to table and code cross-reference index .....................177
INDEX ................................................................................................................................184
xx
MIL-STD-2073-1D
1. SCOPE
1.1 Purpose. This document outlines standard processes for the development and
documentation of military packaging, as distinct from commercial packaging. This standard
covers methods of preservation to protect materiel against environmentally induced corrosion and
deterioration, physical and mechanical damage, and other forms of degradation during storage,
multiple handling, and shipment associated with the military distribution system. A decision chart
is included for developing these packaging requirements (see figure 1).
1.1.1 Definition. For purposes of this standard, military distribution system is defined as
the process(es) by which materiel, not intended for immediate use, is stored or moved within or
between DoD facilities.
1.2 Application.
1.2.1 Applicability. The requirements of this standard apply to:
a
Items expected to enter the military distribution system
b.
Items delivered during wartime
c.
Items requiring reusable containers
d.
Items intended for delivery-at-sea
1.2.2 Non-applicability. Items not going into the military distribution system are to be
packaged in accordance with commercial practice. This includes, but is not limited to, the
following:
a.
Items intended for immediate use
b.
Items for not-mission-capable supply
c.
Items intended for depot operational consumption
d.
Small parcel shipments (CONUS), not-for-stock
e.
Direct vendor deliveries (CONUS)
MIL-STD-2073-1D
Is item entering the *

military distribution
system? (See 1.2)
NO
YES
Are there existing adequate
military packaging
requirements for the item?
Package and ship IAW

commercial practices.
(ASTM-D3951)
NO
YES
Use existing
requirements.
(See A.3.1)
Is item hazardous?
NO
YES
Is item consumable?
YES
Package IAW A.4
NO
Is item fragility factor

less than 50 G's?
Is item fragility factor equal

to or grater than 85 G's?
(See 3.8 and Table I)
NO
YES
YES
NO
Are item weight,
dimensions and
fragility factor
within limits
specified for
containers listed in
Table C. IV?
Are item weight &

dimensions within limits
specified by Table A.II?
YES
Categorize IAW Appendix A

as common item
NO
Can item packaging be

described by codes in Appendix
J and supplemental data?
Select Appendix J codes and

add supplemental data, as req'd
(selective item); (See 5.6 for
validation requirement)
Is specialized long life

container required?
(See C.5)
YES
NO
Interrogate Container Design

Retrieval System (CDRS)
(See C.5.1.2)
Is CDRS response positive?

YES
Use design "AS IS" or

modify if required.
Determine availability
of suitable containers in
DoD inventory for reuse
Could items of
lower or unknown
fragility be
protected by
multi-application
containers? (See
Table C. IV)
NO
YES
NO
YES
NO
Do multi-application
containers meet logistic
needs?
NO
YES
YES
Are item weight

and dimensions
within limits
specified for
containers listed in
Table C. IV?
YES
Design package using

special packaging
instruction (SPI) format
specified in Appendix E
(See 5.6 for validation
requirements)
YES
Will 100 trip long life

container meet logistics
needs?
YES
Use 100 trip long life

container
(See C.5.2.6)
NO
YES
Select Appendix J codes

IAW Appendix A format
(See 5.6 for validation
requirements)
* This decision is to be made by the DOD contracting activity (packaging organization) prior to RFQ or solicitation.
FIGURE 1. Military packaging requirements development decision chart.

2
NO
Can item packaging be

described by codes in
Appendix J and supplemental
data, as req'd?
NO
Use 10 trip short life

container
(See C.5.2.5)
Is it cost effective to use

multi-application
containers?
NO
Will 10 trip short life

container meet logistics
needs?
YES
NO
NO
MIL-STD-2073-1D
2. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections 3, 4, and 5 of
this standard. This section does not include documents cited in other sections of this standard or
recommended for additional information or as examples. While every effort has been made to
ensure the completeness of this list, document users are cautioned that they must meet all
specified requirements documents cited in sections 3, 4, and 5 of this standard, whether or not
they are listed.
2.2 Government documents.
2.2.1 Specifications and standards. The following specifications and standards form a
part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of
these documents are those listed in the issue of the Department of Defense Index of Specifications
and Standards (DoDISS) and supplement thereto, cited in the solicitation (see 6.2).
SPECIFICATIONS
FEDERAL
A-A-3174
QQ-A-1876
PPP-B-1672
Plastic Sheet, Polyolefin.

Aluminum Foil.
Box, Shipping, Reusable with Cushioning.
MIL-B-117
MIL-B-121
MIL-PRF-131
MIL-PRF-3420
MIL-D-3464
MIL-E-6060
MIL-I-8574
MIL-PRF-16173
MIL-PRF-22019
Bags, Sleeves and Tubing.

Barrier Material, Greaseproofed, Waterproofed, Flexible.
Barrier Materials, Watervaporproof, Greaseproof,
Flexible, Heat-Sealable.
Packaging Materials, Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor
Treated, Opaque.
Desiccants, Activated, Bagged, Packaging Use and Static
Dehumidification.
Envelope, Packaging, Water-Vaporproof, Flexible.
Inhibitors, Corrosion, Volatile, Utilization of.
Corrosion Preventive Compound, Solvent Cutback,
Cold-Application.
Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable,
Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor Treated.
MILITARY
MIL-STD-2073-1D
SPECIFICATIONS (continued)
MILITARY (continued)
MIL-B-22020
MIL-PRF-22191
MIL-I-26860
MIL-PRF-81705
Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable, Volatile Corrosion

Inhibitor Treated.
Barrier Material, Transparent, Flexible, Heat Sealable.
Indicator, Humidity, Plug, Color Change.
Barrier Materials, Flexible, Electrostatic Protective, Heat
Sealable.
STANDARDS
FEDERAL
FED-STD-101
Test Procedures for Packaging Materials.
MIL-STD-129
MIL-STD-1186
MS20003
Marking for Shipment and Storage.

Cushioning, Anchoring, Bracing, Blocking and
Waterproofing; With Appropriate Test Methods.
Indicator, Humidity, Card, Three Spot, Impregnated
Areas (Cobaltous Chloride).
MILITARY
(Unless otherwise indicated, copies of the above specifications and standards are available
from the Standardization Documents Order Desk, 700 Robbins Avenue, Building 4D,
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)
2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications. The following other
Government documents, drawings and publications form a part of this document to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues are those cited in the solicitation.
MANUAL
DoD-5220.22M
Industrial Security Manual for Safeguarding Classified

Information.
MIL-STD-2073-1D
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

29 CFR
Labor.
40 CFR
Protection of Environment.
49 CFR
Transportation.
(Application for copies should be addressed to the Superintendent of Documents, U.S

Government Printing Office, North Capital & H Streets, N.W., Washington, DC 20402.)
2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this
document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of the documents
which are DoD adopted are those listed in the issue of the DoDISS cited in the solicitation.
Unless otherwise specified, the issues of documents not listed in the DoDISS are the issues of the
documents cited in the solicitation (see 6.2).
AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)
ASTM-D996
ASTM-D1008 ASTM-D1974 ASTM-D3951 ASTM-D5118 ASTM-D5168 ASTM-D5330 -
Standard Terminology of Packaging and Distribution Environments

(DoD adopted).
Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Shipping
Containers (DoD adopted).
Methods of Closing, Sealing, and Reinforcing Fiberboard Boxes
(DoD adopted).
Standard Practice for Commercial Packaging (DoD adopted).
Fabrication of Fiberboard Shipping Boxes.
Fabrication and Closure of Triple Wall Corrugated Fiberboard
Containers (DoD adopted).
Tape, Pressure Sensitive, Packaging Filament Reinforced.
(Application for copies should be addressed to the American Society for Testing and
Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)
2.4 Order of precedence. In the event of a conflict between the text of this document and
the references cited herein, the text of this document takes precedence. Nothing in this document,
however, supersedes applicable laws and regulations unless a specific exemption has been
obtained.
MIL-STD-2073-1D
3. DEFINITIONS
3.1 General. Definitions of terms unique to this standard are listed below. Definitions of
other terms commonly used in the packaging community may be found in ASTM-D996.
3.2 Categorization. The process of evaluating an item by chemical and physical
characteristics that are significant in determining the preservation requirements.
3.3 Common group items. Items with a fragility rating of 85 G's (see 3.8) or more which
have no dimension greater than 24 inches and weigh not more than 10 pounds for which
predetermined packaging has been developed (see A.5.4 and table A.IV). Hazardous materials,
electrostatic discharge sensitive items, shelf life items, sets, and kits are excluded from this group
regardless of their fragility, size, or weight.
3.4 Consumable. An item of supply (except explosive ordnance, major end items of
equipment, and repairables) that is normally expended or used up beyond recovery in the use for
which it was designed or intended.
3.5 Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS). A management system program to
provide a DoD centralized automated data base system for storing, retrieving and analyzing
existing container designs and test information concerning specialized containers. The purpose of
the CDRS is to avoid duplication in container designs, minimize the number of new container
designs being developed and promote reuse of existing DoD specialized containers for new item
development and procurement (see Appendix H).
3.6 Critical items. Items meeting one or more of the following criteria are considered
critical.
a.
Critical chemically. Items which are of such a nature that any degree of
deterioration (in the form of corrosion, stain, scale, mold, fungi, or bacteria) caused
by oxygen, moisture, sunlight, living organisms, and other contaminants which are
time or temperature dependent, will result in premature failure or malfunction of the
item or equipment in which the item is installed or with which the item interfaces.
b.
Critical physically. Items that would become unfit for use as a result of physical
action on the item or any integral surfaces thereof. This includes, but is not limited
to items having a surface finish of 64 microinches root mean square or less, items
which have surfaces that mate with surfaces of other parts, optical and reflective
devices having highly polished surfaces, items requiring a high degree of
MIL-STD-2073-1D
cleanliness, and items requiring special protection against shock, vibration, or

abrasion.
c.
Critical application. Items that, either in assembly or operation, provide an essential

attribute to attaining critical military objectives.
3.7 Electrostatic Discharge Sensitive (ESDS) items. Electronic items which are
susceptible to damage or degradation as a result of an electrostatic discharge event.
3.8 Fragility factor. Maximum force acceleration or deceleration expressed in units of
gravity (G's) that can be applied to an item in its non-operating state without causing physical
damage or changes in its operational characteristics. The fragility factor is expressed in units of
acceleration for a defined shock pulse. Shock pulse forms and durations which approximate the
transportation and handling environment is to be used in determining the fragility factor (see table
I).
3.9 Hazardous material. A material, substance, or waste which has been determined by
the Secretary of Transportation to be capable of posing an unreasonable risk to health, safety, and
property when transported in commerce and which has been so designated. (This includes all
items listed as hazardous in Titles 29, 40 and 49 CFR and other applicable modal regulations
effective at the time of shipment.)
3.10 Levels of protection. A means of specifying the level of military preservation and
packing that a given item requires to ensure that it is not degraded during shipment and storage.
Specific levels of protection are as follows:
a.
Military level of preservation. Preservation designed to protect an item during

shipment, handling, indeterminate storage, and distribution to consignees
worldwide.
b.
Military levels of packing.

(1) Level A. Protection required to meet the most severe worldwide shipment,
handling, and storage conditions. A Level A pack must, in tandem with the
applied preservation, be capable of protecting material from the effects of direct
exposure to extremes of climate, terrain, and operational and transportation
environments. Examples of situations which indicate a need for use of a Level
A pack are: War Reserve Material, mobilization, strategic and theater
deployment and employment, open storage, and deck loading. Examples of
containers used for Level A packing requirements include, but are
7
MIL-STD-2073-1D
not limited to, overseas type wood boxes, and plastic and metal reusable
containers.
(2) Level B. Protection required to meet moderate worldwide shipment, handling,
and storage conditions. A Level B pack must, in tandem with the applied
preservation, be capable of protecting material not directly exposed to extremes
of climate, terrain, and operational and transportation environments. Examples
of situations which indicate a need for use of a Level B pack are: security
assistance (for example, Foreign Military Sales (FMS)) and containerized
overseas shipments. Examples of containers used for Level B packing
requirements include, but are not limited to, domestic wood crates, weatherresistant fiberboard containers, fast pack containers, weather-resistant fiber
drums, and weather-resistant paper and multi-wall shipping sacks.
3.11 Loads. Types of loads are determined by the degree of structural strength supplied
to the shipping container by the contents. Loads are classified as Type 1, easy loads; Type 2,
average loads; and Type 3, difficult loads, as described below:
a.
Type 1, easy load. A Type 1, easy load, is developed from an item which
completely fills the outer shipping container or from items of moderate density
prepackaged in an interior container which completely fill the outer shipping
container. Easy load items are not easily damaged by puncture or shock and do not
shift or otherwise move within the package. Examples include items packaged in
boxes or cans which are prepackaged in fiberboard boxes prior to overpacking in the
shipping container; chests; tool kits; and sturdy instruments which are fully in
contact with, and support, all faces of the shipping container.
b.
Type 2, average load. A Type 2, average load, is developed from item(s) of

moderately concentrated weight which are packed directly into the shipping
container and provide partial support to all panels thereof. It also includes item(s)
prepackaged by wrapping or by positioning in partitions, cells or paperboard boxes,
or by other means which provide support to all panels of the shipping container.
Examples include items packaged in boxes or cans which are not prepackaged in an
interior container; bottles individually separated one from the other by cells or
partitions.
c.
Type 3, difficult load. A Type 3, difficult load is developed from item(s) which
require a high degree of protection to prevent puncture, shock, or distortion of the
shipping container. It also includes item(s) which do not provide complete support
to the panels of the shipping container. Examples include wrenches, long bolts, and
8
MIL-STD-2073-1D
rods which exert concentrated forces on the shipping container; motors, telephones,
typewriters, drop forgings, rivets, hardware, or other items that are random packed
in bulk; and fragile or delicate items requiring special protection.
3.12 Packaging design validation. Testing to ascertain the capability of the prototype
pack to protect the integrity and serviceability of the item(s) for which the package is designed.
3.13 Prototype pack. A preproduction pack designed and constructed to meet specified
requirements and which is the model for production packaging.
3.14 Proper shipping name. The name of the hazardous material shown in Roman print
(not italics) in part 172.101 of Title 49 CFR or the applicable modal regulations.
3.15 Repairable item. An item which, by the application of engineering, economic, and
other factors, could be reasonably restored to a serviceable condition through regular repair
procedures.
3.16 Reusable container. A shipping and storage container that can be reused without
impairment of its protective function and which can be repaired or retrofitted to prolong its life or
modified to adapt it for shipment of items other than that for which it was originally intended.
Reusable shipping and storage containers are further defined as follows:
a.
Long life container (100 trips minimum). A shipping container that can be used
repeatedly, and whose service life can be expected to equal the service life of the
item it is designed to protect. These containers may be refurbished by appropriate
maintenance practices to their original condition and subsequently reused.
b.
Short life container (10 trips minimum). A shipping container that can be reused for
a limited number of times. The container is usually made of wood, plywood,
fiberboard or similar material that has a limited life.
c.
Multiapplication containers. Multiapplication containers are designed to protect a

variety of components within a given fragility and size range. They can be
manufactured in a similar manner to that used for specialized containers or in
accordance with applicable/specified military or federal specifications. A
multiapplication container can be either of the short-life or long-life variety. Short
life multiapplication containers include "fast packs," consisting of a family of
standard size cushioned fiberboard shipping containers of four types. These types
are fully described in PPP-B-1672 and are identified as Types I, II, III and IV in
table C.IV. Long-life multiapplication reusable containers are designated as Types
9
MIL-STD-2073-1D
VI thru X and are also described in table C.IV. These containers are made of
rugged plastic construction containing internal cushioning pads or permanent shock
mitigation systems (for example, shear mounts, steel coils, and springs.) and are
designed to protect repairable components packaged therein, during forward and
retrograde movements within the military supply system.
d.
Specialized container. Specialized containers are generally the long-life variety and
are uniquely configured to support and protect a specific item, or limited variety of
items, during handling and storage or to protect personnel and equipment from
hazardous contents. Containers of this type frequently incorporate energy absorbing
systems, temperature control systems or special features to make handling or
shipment possible, easier or safer. Engineering drawings, or equivalent, are used to
define form, fit, function, materials, tolerances and manufacturing techniques.
Internal fixtures and other fitments within specialized shipping containers result from
either original design efforts or the redesign or modification of an existing container
to meet a specific application or need.
3.17 Sealed. An item is considered sealed if the entrances to the interior of the item are
sealed with gaskets or closely mated surfaces under mechanical pressure or are sealed by threaded
closure devices (except plastic caps). Sealed items also include assemblies which are encapsulated
in plastics, ceramics, glass or metal with completely cemented seams or joints closing the interior
to the entrance of liquid water. Hermetic sealing is a seal that will exclude air and will be
leakproof at ambient temperatures and atmospheric pressures and is usually glass to glass, metal
to metal or metal to glass.
3.18 Selective group items. Items that cannot appropriately utilize predetermined
packaging developed for common group items (see 3.3) yet do not require a drawing, sketch,
illustration or separate narrative type instruction to specify packaging details.
3.19 Special group items. Items with peculiar characteristics such as weight, configuration,
complexity, fragility, or other considerations that cannot be classified as common or selective. An
item is considered special if drawings, sketches, illustrations, narrative type instructions or
specialized containers are required to specify packaging details.
4. GENERAL MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS
4.1 General. Military packaging requirements shall be developed using the figure 1
decision chart in accordance with the requirements of this section, Section 5 and all Appendices
herein. The developed military packaging requirements shall be documented in accordance with
Appendix E and as specified on the Contract Data Requirements List (CDRL) (see 6.3). These
10
MIL-STD-2073-1D
requirements are generally defined by a twelve digit position-sensitive code system, as illustrated
in figure A.1. Appropriate codes are drawn from those listed in Appendix J. When an item has
been determined to be in the special group category, a Special Packaging Instruction shall be
required, prepared in accordance with Appendix E and as specified on the CDRL (see 6.3).
4.2 Development of military packaging details and data requirements. If this standard is
cited for use and no specific military packaging details or data requirements are contained in the
contract, the contracting officer shall be contacted for same. Appendix A and other applicable
sections and appendices of this standard shall be used to develop detailed military packaging
requirements in cases where the development of packaging data by the contractor is cited.
4.3 Hazardous material. Packaging for hazardous materials shall be developed in
accordance with the requirements detailed in A.4.
4.4 Packaging of classified items. Packaging developed for classified items shall meet the
requirements of DoD 5220.22M, Industrial Security Manual for Safeguarding Classified
Information.
4.5 Quantity per unit pack (QUP). The QUP shall be determined in accordance with
Appendix B.
4.6 Containers. Requirements for containers and their selection for military packaging
applications are detailed in Appendix C.
4.7 Kits. Military packaging of parts kits or modification kits shall be in accordance with
Appendix D.
4.8 Repairable excess and residual parts. Repairable excess and residual part(s) for which
packaging has not been stipulated by the acquisition activity shall be packaged to afford adequate
protection as required to prevent further deterioration due to rust, corrosion, or physical damage.
Unless otherwise specified by the acquisition activity, the QUP shall be one.
4.9 Loose fill materials. Loose fill materials are prohibited in all military packages.
4.10 Shock and vibration absorption. Shock and vibration absorption shall be provided
by cushioning materials or devices that adequately protect the contents and packaging
components from physical damage during handling, shipment and storage. A cushioning medium
shall be placed as close to the contents as practicable. A noncorrosive wrap shall be placed
between the item and all corrosive type cushioning media.
11
MIL-STD-2073-1D
4.11 Determination of item fragility. Fragility factors in the non-operating state of the
item, established in the item specification, shall be used to establish the maximum energy
permitted to reach the item during transportation and handling. When fragility factors are not
available or established, criteria of table I can be used to approximate G factors. Caution shall be
taken to ensure that there are no additional components installed which lower the item fragility
rating.
4.12 Packaging materials. The use of new or commercially available packaging materials
or products is encouraged and recommended provided they are equal to or better than similar
approved materials or products without increasing the overall cost to the government. To
expedite the use of these materials prior to their inclusion in government specifications, their
prompt use will be permitted under conditions outlined herein. In instances where the material or
product is not covered by a specific specification or standard, the manufacturer or fabricator of
the material or product shall make available documented evidence by an approved testing
laboratory, that the material or product meets or exceeds all performance requirements of the
specification for a similar material or product. The request for approval shall be submitted to the
acquisition activity via the technical packaging element of the contract management activity.
5. DETAILED MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS
5.1 General military package design considerations. Military packaging shall be of
minimum cost consistent with required performance. Unit packs shall be designed to conserve
weight and cube while retaining the protection required and enhancing standardization.
5.2 Military preservation. The military preservation procedure should be accomplished
without interruption. When interruptions are unavoidable, temporary wraps, covers or enclosures
shall be provided to insure against contamination or deterioration of the items.
5.2.1 Cleaning and drying. Items shall be cleaned and dried by any suitable process or
processes which are not injurious to the item. All items shall pass the applicable cleaning and
drying inspection requirements of table G.I.
5.2.2 Preservatives.
5.2.2.1 Preservative applicability. When contact preservatives are required to protect an
item from chemical deterioration, they shall conform to table J.III. Preservatives selected shall be
those whose application, use, or removal will not damage the item or impair item function.
5.2.2.2 Application of contact preservatives. Directly after cleaning and drying of the
item, the required preservative shall be uniformly applied by any appropriate procedure that
12
MIL-STD-2073-1D
permits the preservative to coat all necessary surfaces. Suggested methods of application include,
but are not limited to:
a.
Dipping
b.
Flow coating
c.
Slushing
d.
Brushing
e.
Filling or flushing
f.
Fogging
g.
Spraying
5.2.2.3 Application and use criteria of volatile corrosion inhibitors (VCI). Volatile
corrosion inhibitor preservative treatment shall be applied in accordance with the criteria and
procedures of MIL-I-8574.
5.2.3 Methods of military preservation - general requirements. There are five basic
methods of preservation (MOP) defined herein:
Method 10 (formerly Method III)
Method 20 (formerly Method I)
Method 30 (formerly Method IC)
Method 40 (formerly Method IA)
Method 50 (formerly Method II)
Physical protection
Preservative coating only
Waterproof protection
Watervaporproof protection
Watervaporproof protection with desiccant
Various specific techniques, also defined herein, have been developed to meet the basic Methods
30, 40, and 50 which may be used as appropriate. The preservation methods shall be as specified
in the contract or purchase order. In the absence of such requirements, the appropriate method
shall be selected in accordance with the applicable tables of Appendix A. The following general
requirements will apply:
a.
Protection from physical damage and mechanical malfunction is required for all
methods of preservation in addition to the specific environment protection
provided.
13
MIL-STD-2073-1D
b.
When methods provide either transparent or opaque protection, transparent

protection may be furnished at the option of the supplier but is not required unless
specifically called for in the contract or purchase order.
c.
Protection for all electrostatic discharge sensitive items requires the use of
packaging materials to counteract electrostatic and electromagnetic field forces
(see 5.2.4.1).
d.
When specific methods require using a bag or container, preliminary wrapping,

cushioning or other dunnage material shall be applied as necessary to protect the
item, the bag, and the container from all projections or sharp edges of the item as
well as to restrict movement of the item within the unit pack.
e.
When methods require chipboard or fiberboard containers within the bag, the
corners and edges of the containers shall be blunted prior to placing the item in the
box and enclosing within the bag.
f.
When a transparent unit pack is specified, the preliminary wrapping shall also be
transparent. Items preserved with VCI-treated materials are exempted from
preliminary wrapping.
g.
Methods of preservation requiring the use of a bag for the interior packaging shall
be subject to the use and fabrication procedures and limitations of MIL-B-117.
Table II lists the acceptable materials that may be used in constructing bags that
meet the requirements of these specific methods of preservation. Bags shall
comply with MIL-E-6060 when the construction limitations of MIL-B-117 are
exceeded.
h.
All cushioning and dunnage used shall be as clean and dry as practicable to
minimize item susceptibility to corrosion and contaminants.
i.
Items with handles, knobs or other protrusions shall be wrapped or otherwise

protected and secured to facilitate equal distribution of shock forces over the entire
surface of the item and thus prevent damaging shock forces to the protrusion.
j.
When flexible bags are used, the volume of trapped air within the bag shall be kept
to a minimum by compressing the bag around the contents, or by carefully drawing
a vacuum inside the bag, prior to final sealing. Caution shall be taken to prevent
rupture of the bag.
14
MIL-STD-2073-1D
5.2.3.1 Surfaces coated with preservatives. Preliminary wrapping materials in contact with
any item coated with a preservative shall be greaseproof and shall conform to MIL-B-121, Grade
A, or QQ-A-1876. Greaseproof wraps applied solely to confine the contact preservative on item
surfaces are not necessary when a method requires a bag as the preliminary container and the bag
is made of material conforming to MIL-B-121, Grade A, MIL-PRF-131, or MIL-PRF-22191,
Type I or II. However, wraps shall not be excluded if necessary to protect the bags from rupture
or perforation.
5.2.3.2 Metal surfaces not coated with preservatives. Only noncorrosive wrapping,
cushioning and dunnage materials meeting the test requirements of FED-STD-101, Test Method
3005, shall be used in contact with metal surfaces of the item. Materials also must be as dry and
clean as practicable at the time of use.
5.2.3.3 Method 10 (formerly Method III) - Physical protection. The unpreserved item(s)
shall be protected from physical damage and mechanical malfunction. Cushioning materials,
dunnage, blocking and bracing shall be applied as required to protect the item(s) and the enclosing
media and restrict the movement of the item within the container. Materials shall be as clean and
as dry as practicable. Blocking and bracing shall be accomplished in accordance with MIL-STD1186. Method 10 packs shall pass the applicable inspection requirements of table G.I.
5.2.3.4 Method 20 (formerly Method I) - Preservative coating only (with greaseproof
wrap, as required). Items shall be treated with appropriate preservatives in accordance with the
procedures of 5.2.2.2 or 5.2.2.3. Contact preservative coated items shall be wrapped in material
conforming to MIL-B-121, Grade A, or QQ-A-1876. Flexible wraps shall snugly enclose the
coated part or item and be secured to prevent unintentional unwrapping. Parts or items coated
with hard film preservatives conforming to MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 1 or 4, may, when dried, be
exempted from wrapping. Items preserved with VCI treated materials conforming to
MIL-PRF-3420 or MIL-PRF-22019, respectively taped or sealed to form an airtight enclosure,
are also exempted from wrapping. Projections, sharp edges, or other features of the item, which
may damage the barrier wrap, shall be cushioned as required in accordance with 5.2.3. The type
of cushioning and barrier material used shall be commensurate with the size, weight and
configuration of the preserved part or item. Method 20 packs shall pass the applicable inspection
requirements of table G.I.
5.2.3.5 Method 30 (formerly Method IC) - Waterproof or waterproof-greaseproof
protection with preservative as required. Items protected in accordance with Method 30 shall be
sealed within a waterproof or waterproof-greaseproof bag. Projections, sharp edges or other
physical characteristics of the item, which may damage the waterproof or waterproof-greaseproof
barrier or container shall be cushioned in accordance with 5.2.3. The item shall also be cushioned
as required to mitigate shock, thereby preventing physical and functional damage to
15
MIL-STD-2073-1D
the item. Unless otherwise specified, preservative coating requirements shall be determined in
accordance with 5.2.2.1. All packs prepared in accordance with any method of this basic group
shall pass the applicable quality assurance tests specified in tables G.I and G.II.
5.2.3.5.1 Method 31 (formerly Submethod IC-3) - Waterproof bag, sealed. The item,
preserved, wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.5, shall be enclosed in a sealed bag
conforming to MIL-B-117, Type I, Class B, Style 2, or MIL-B-22020 as limited by MIL-I-8574.
When specified, a designated bag, other than noted herein, shall be provided. (Note: When
specified in the contract or purchase order, a carton or box shall be required to effect the unit
container and the primary cushioning specified in the contract or purchase order shall be placed
between the outside of the bag and the inside of the carton or box.)
5.2.3.5.2 Method 32 (formerly Submethod IC-2) - Container, waterproof bag, sealed.
The item, preserved, wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.5, shall be enclosed in a close
fitting container (box) selected from table C.I, which in turn shall be enclosed in a sealed
waterproof bag conforming to MIL-B-117, Type I, Class B, Style 2. When specified, a protective
wrap of heavy duty kraft paper or equivalent material (tape sealed) shall be provided to protect
the barrier material during handling and storage.
5.2.3.5.3 Method 33 (formerly Submethod IC-1) - Greaseproof-waterproof bag, sealed.
The item, preserved, wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.5, shall be enclosed in a close
fitting sealed bag conforming to MIL-B-117, Type I, Class C, Style 1, 2 or 3; or Type II, Class C,
Style 1; or bags conforming to MIL-B-22020 as limited by MIL-I-8574. When specified in the
contract or purchase order, a designated bag, other than noted herein, shall be provided. (Note:
When specified in the contract or purchase order, a carton or box shall be required to effect the
unit container, and the primary cushioning specified in the contract or purchase order shall be
placed between the outside of the bag and the inside of the carton or box.)
5.2.3.6 Method 40 (formerly Method IA) - Watervaporproof protection with preservative
as required. Items protected in accordance with Method 40 shall be sealed within a
watervaporproof enclosure. Projections, sharp edges or other physical characteristics of the item,
which may damage the watervaporproof enclosure, shall be cushioned as required in accordance
with 5.2.3. The item shall also be cushioned as required to mitigate shock, thereby preventing
physical and functional damage to the item. Unless otherwise specified, preservative coating
requirements shall be determined in accordance with 5.2.2.1. All packs prepared in accordance
with any method of this basic group shall pass the applicable quality assurance tests specified in
tables G.I and G.II.
5.2.3.6.1 Method 41 (formerly Submethod IA-8) - Watervaporproof bag, sealed. The
item, wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6, shall be enclosed in a close fitting heat sealed
bag conforming to MIL-B-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1, 2 or 3; or Type I, Class F,
16
MIL-STD-2073-1D
Style 1; or Type III, Class E, Style 1. (Note: For electrostatic protection refer to 5.2.4.1.) When
specified in the contract or purchase order, a designated bag, other than noted herein, shall be
furnished. (Note: When specified in the contract or purchase order, a carton or box shall be
required to complete the unit container and the primary cushioning specified in the contract or
purchase order shall be placed between the outside of the bag and the inside of the carton or box.)
5.2.3.6.2 Method 42 (formerly Submethod IA-14) - Container, watervaporproof bag,
sealed, container. The item, wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6, shall be enclosed in a
close fitting inner container (box), selected from table C.I, and enclosed in a sealed bag
conforming to MIL-B-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1; or Type III, Class E, Style 1. Bags in
accordance with MIL-E-6060 shall be used when the construction limitations of MIL-B-117 are
exceeded. When specified in the contract or purchase order, a designated bag, other than noted
herein, shall be furnished. The sealed bag shall then be enclosed within an appropriate outer
container (box), selected from tables C.I or C.II, unless otherwise specified in the contract or
purchase order. When fiberboard containers are selected or specified for the outer container of
this method, they shall conform to the weather resistant class and grade of ASTM-D5118 or
ASTM-D5168 as applicable. When wood, wood cleated plywood, or wood cleated fiberboard is
specified as the outer container of this method, 6 mil polyethylene film conforming to A-A-3174
or equivalent material shall be used as an overwrap (tape sealed) around the sealed bag to prevent
chafing or rupture by the outer container. When the primary cushioning is located between the
sealed bag and the outer container, this overwrap is not required. Closure, banding, or sealing of
the outer container shall be performed in accordance with the applicable container specification
procedures or ASTM-D1974, making certain that no damage is inflicted on the bag. (Note:
When the outer container becomes the shipping container, it shall be marked as a shipping
container in accordance with MIL-STD-129; the bag shall be marked as a unit pack in accordance
with MIL-STD-129.)
5.2.3.6.3 Method 43 (formerly Submethod IA-16) - Floating watervaporproof bag,
sealed. The item, preserved, wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6 and anchored or shock
mounted as required in MIL-STD-1186, shall be enclosed in a sealed bag conforming to
MIL-E-6060. (Note: When the outer container becomes the shipping container, it shall be
marked as a shipping container in accordance with MIL-STD-129; the bag shall be marked as a
unit pack in accordance with MIL-STD-129.)
5.2.3.6.4 Method 44 (formerly Submethod IA-13) - Rigid container (other than metal),
sealed. The item, preserved, wrapped, and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6, shall be enclosed in a
sealed, snug fitting, rigid container other than all metal. Any sealed rigid container other than all
metal may be used if the sealed container provides a watervapor transmission rate (WVTR) not
exceeding 0.075 grams per 100 square inches per 24 hours when tested in accordance with
ASTM-D1008.
17
MIL-STD-2073-1D
5.2.3.6.5 Method 45 (formerly Submethod IA-5) - Rigid metal container, sealed. The
item, preserved, wrapped and cushioned as required in 5.2.3.6, shall be snugly enclosed in a
sealed, rigid metal container. Any selected type of rigid metal container with machine seamed or
reusable gasketed closure may be used if the container provides a WVTR not exceeding 0.075
grams per 100 square inches per 24 hours, when tested in accordance with ASTM-D1008 unless a
specific type of container and closure is specified in the contract or purchase order. When
specified in the contract or purchase order or when dictated by the requirements of the item, the
metal container may be vacuum sealed.
5.2.3.7 Method 50 (formerly Method II) - Watervaporproof protection with desiccant.
Items protected in accordance with Method 50 shall be sealed in a watervaporproof enclosure
with activated desiccant as required. Unless otherwise stated in the contract or purchase order,
unit packs of all of these methods shall include a humidity indicator. Projections, sharp edges, or
other physical characteristics of the item which may damage the watervaporproof bag or container
shall be cushioned as required in accordance with 5.2.3. The item shall also be cushioned as
required to mitigate shock, thereby preventing physical and functional damage to the item. Unless
otherwise specified, preservative coating requirements shall be determined in accordance with
5.2.2.1. When bags are used, the bag size shall be of sufficient surface area to permit two
subsequent resealings after item inspection, unless otherwise specified. Unless prohibited in the
contract or purchase order, carrying cases or housings, which function as a sealed container, may
also be used as the watervaporproof enclosure within which the desiccant and humidity indicator
will be placed. Precautions must be prominently noted on the item cases or housings that the
desiccant and indicator cards must be removed prior to placing the item into use. Requirements
for desiccant and humidity indicators are as follows:
a.
Desiccant (activated) - The bagged, activated desiccant shall conform to MIL-D3464. Type I shall be used unless Type II or III is specified or required because of
special characteristics of the item. Desiccant shall be in standard unit sized bags.
The desiccant shall be strategically located in the pack so as not to be load bearing.
Optimally, it should be placed in voids of the item or pack interior. Desiccant shall
be adequately secured to prevent its shifting or movement or placed in specially
designed desiccant baskets affixed to the container interior. Under no circumstances
shall desiccant be permitted to come in direct contact with critical surfaces of the
enclosed item. The desiccant shall not be unnecessarily exposed to the ambient
environment when removed from the sealed desiccant storage container. Removal
of the desiccant and its insertion into the unit pack shall be the last action prior to
final sealing of the bag or container.
18
MIL-STD-2073-1D
b.
Quantity of desiccant - The minimum quantity of desiccant to be used per unit pack
shall be computed in accordance with either Formula I or II as applicable. The
various values of "X" take into consideration the quality and types of dunnage. The
inner container (when applicable) must be considered in the dunnage calculations.
Formula I - To find units of desiccant for use within a sealed container other than
rigid all metal:
U = CA + X1D + X2D + X3D + X4D
Formula II - To find units of desiccant for use within a sealed rigid metal container:
U = KV + X1D + X2D + X3D + X4D
Symbols used above are defined as follows:
U = The number of units of desiccant to be used.
C = 0.011 when the area of the barrier material is stated in square inches.
C = 1.6 when the area of the barrier material is stated in square feet.
A = Area of container (barrier) stated in square inches or square feet.
K = 0.0007 when volume is stated in cubic inches.
K = 1.2 when volume is stated in cubic feet.
V = Volume within rigid metal container in cubic inches or cubic feet.
X1 = 8.0 for cellulosic material, including wood and any other material not noted
below.
X2 = 3.6 for bound fibers (synthetic or vegetable fibers bound with rubber).
X3 = 2.0 for glass fibers (fiberglass).
X4 = 0.5 for synthetic foams and rubber.
D = Pounds of dunnage within the container.
19
MIL-STD-2073-1D
Note: Formula II may also be used to determine the units of desiccant required for
sealed rigid containers other than all metal, when the sealed enclosure provides a
WVTR not exceeding 0.001 grams per 24 hours per 100 square inches, tested in
accordance with ASTM-D1008 as appropriate.
c.
Humidity indicators. Humidity indicators shall conform to MS20003, unless

otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order. The humidity indicator shall
be firmly secured directly behind the inspection window or immediately within the
closure seal of the container. When specified, externally mounted humidity
indicating elements or devices shall be installed in the barrier or rigid container used
to effect the unit pack. Unless otherwise specified, externally mounted color change
humidity indicating devices shall conform to MIL-I-26860.
All packs prepared in accordance with any method of this basic group shall pass the applicable
quality assurance tests of tables G.I and G.II.
5.2.3.7.1 Method 51 (formerly Submethod IIc) - Watervaporproof bag, sealed. The item,
preserved, wrapped, cushioned and desiccated as required in 5.2.3.7, shall be enclosed within a
sealed bag conforming to MIL-B-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1, 2 or 3; or Type III, Class E, Style
1. When specified in the contract or purchase order, a designated bag, other than noted herein,
shall be furnished. (Note: When specified in the contract or purchase order, a carton or box shall
be required to complete the unit container, and the primary cushioning specified in the contract or
purchase order shall be placed between the outside of the bag and the inside of the carton or box.)
5.2.3.7.2 Method 52 (formerly Submethod IIb) - Container, watervaporproof bag, sealed,
container. The item, preserved, wrapped, cushioned and desiccated as required in accordance
with 5.2.3.7, shall be enclosed in a close fitting inner container (box) selected from table C.I. The
item and container shall then be enclosed in a sealed bag conforming to MIL-B-117, Type I, Class
E, Style 1; or Type III, Class E, Style 1. When specified in the contract or purchase order, a
designated bag, other than noted herein, shall be furnished. Bags in accordance with MIL-E-6060
shall be used when the construction limitations of MIL-B-117 are exceeded. The sealed bag shall
then be enclosed within an appropriate outer container (box) selected from tables C.I or C.II.
When fiberboard outer containers are used, they shall conform to the weather resistant Class and
Grade of ASTM-D5118 or ASTM-D5168 as applicable. When wood, wood cleated plywood or
wood cleated fiberboard boxes are specified as the outer container, a 6 mil polyethylene film
conforming to A-A-3174 or equivalent material shall be used as an overwrap (tape sealed) around
the sealed bag to prevent chafing or rupture by the outer container. When the primary cushioning
is located between the sealed bag and the outer container, this overwrap is not required. Closure
sealing or banding (as applicable) shall be in accordance with the
20
MIL-STD-2073-1D
applicable container specification procedures or ASTM-D1974, making certain that the bag is not
damaged. (Note: When the outer container becomes the shipping container, it shall be marked as
a shipping container in accordance with MIL-STD-129; the bag shall be marked as a unit pack in
accordance with MIL-STD-129.)
5.2.3.7.3 Method 53 (formerly Submethod IIa) - Floating watervaporproof bag, sealed.
The item, wrapped, cushioned, and desiccated as required in 5.2.3.7 and anchored or shock
mounted as required in MIL-STD-1186, shall be enclosed in a sealed bag conforming to MIL-E6060. When specified in the contract or purchase order, a window of material conforming to
MIL-PRF-22191, Type I shall be provided in the bag in accordance with MIL-E-6060 procedures
for packs 15 cubic feet or larger. When specified, externally mounted plug type humidity
indicators conforming to MIL-I-26860 shall be used. When an exterior container is to be placed
over the floating bag, a removable inspection port shall be provided in the exterior container body,
so situated as to coincide with the location of the inspection window of the bag or the mounted
humidity plug.
5.2.3.7.4 Method 54 (formerly Submethod IIf) - Rigid container (other than metal),
sealed. The item, preserved, wrapped, cushioned and desiccated as required in 5.2.3.7, shall be
enclosed in a sealed, close fitting, rigid container other than all metal. Any sealed, rigid container
other than all metal may be used if the sealed container provides a WVTR not exceeding 0.075
grams per 100 square inches per 24 hours when tested in accordance with ASTM-D1008.
5.2.3.7.5 Method 55 (formerly Submethod IId) - Rigid metal container, sealed. The item,
preserved, wrapped, cushioned and desiccated as required in 5.2.3.7, shall be enclosed in a sealed,
close fitting, metal container. Any selected type of rigid metal container with a machine seamed
or welded closure or reusable container with a gasketed or threaded closure may be used if the
sealed container provides a WVTR not exceeding 0.075 grams per 100 square inches per 24
hours, when tested in accordance with ASTM-D1008, unless a specific type of rigid metal
container and closure is specified in the contract or purchase order.
5.2.4 Military preservation requirements for items with specific characteristics.
5.2.4.1 Electrostatic discharge sensitive (ESDS) items. ESDS items shall be preserved in
accordance with table J.Ia, Code "GX".
5.2.4.2 Items capable of disassembly. Items may be disassembled into component parts
provided an overall saving will result and disassembly and reassembly can be accomplished with
the use of common hand tools by semi-skilled personnel.
21
MIL-STD-2073-1D
5.2.4.3 Flexible-coilable items. Flexible, coilable items constructed in a loop, such as fan
belts or door seals, having a 14 inch diameter or greater, shall be looped so as not to distort or
otherwise damage the item. Items shall not be looped if undue strain or damage will occur. Items
that are practical to roll or fold shall be rolled or folded to the minimum cube that will prevent
deformation or set to the item during long term storage.
5.2.4.4 Wheeled items. Rubber tired wheels, pneumatic or solid, shall be blocked clear of
the floor of the crate or the skid and shall not be load bearing. When specified, wheeled items
shall be shipped uncrated as mobile packs.
5.2.4.5 Caging or damping. Items such as instruments or gyroscopes, which incorporate
caging or damping features for securing movable parts in place, shall be properly engaged or
electrically damped prior to packaging.
5.2.4.6 Items with mounts. Equipment containing vibration-shock mounts shall not be
shipped on the mounts unless they are immobilized by blocking or unless the mounts are an
integral internal part of the equipment. In either event, a suitable cushioning system shall be
provided.
5.2.4.7 Rubber and synthetic rubber items. When rubber or synthetic rubber items are
unit packed in quantities of two or more, the individual pieces shall be dusted with technical
talcum (soapstone) conforming to commercial standards, or separated by kraft or plastic film
separators.
5.2.4.8 Hazardous items. Hazardous items shall be packaged in accordance with table
J.Ia, Code "HM".
5.3 Level A and B packing requirements.
5.3.1 Intermediate containers. Intermediate containers shall be used under any one of the
following conditions:
a.
When they are considered economical because of total quantity on order, production
schedule or when they facilitate handling, storage and reshipment.
b.
When the quantity to be shipped to a single destination permits the use of two or
more intermediate containers in an exterior container.
c.
When the exterior surface of the unit pack is a bag or wrap of any kind.
22
MIL-STD-2073-1D
d.
When specified by the acquisition activity.
5.3.2 Exterior containers. When practicable, the exterior container being shipped to a single
destination shall:
a.
Contain items of the same National Stock Number.
b.
Contain identical quantities of unit/intermediate packs.
c.
Contain items of the same contract.
d.
Contain items having the same lot number, cure, manufacture or expiration date.
e.
Be the most cost effective and be of minimum cube to contain and protect the items.
5.3.2.1 Container selection. Acceptable shipping containers for Levels A and B military
packing are listed in table C.II. Selection criteria shall reflect the most economical container that
will provide the required protection for any given military packing application.
5.4 Minimal packing requirements. When anticipated logistics paths indicate that items
requiring military preservation, as outlined in this standard, will not be exposed to shipping
environments more severe than those normally encountered in the commercial distribution system,
military packing requirements need not be implemented. Acceptable minimal packing
requirements for shipments of this nature are listed in table J.IXa.
5.5 Marking. All unit, intermediate and exterior packs shall be marked in accordance
with MIL-STD-129 and additional marking requirements as specified by the acquisition activity.
Interior bags or containers, when enclosed within another container to complete a unit pack (see
table G.I, Note 2), shall also be marked as specified for unit pack identification in MIL-STD-129.
5.6 Military packaging design validation provisions. Unless otherwise specified in the
contract or purchase order, the contractor shall be required to perform packaging design
validation tests on selective and special group items in accordance with Appendix F unless one of
the following conditions exist:
a.
Furnished data - Detailed packaging instructions or design are furnished by the

acquisition activity. This includes the predetermined codes to be used for common
items.
23
MIL-STD-2073-1D
b.
Previous test records - The contractor has previous successful test records for the
same or a similar item.
c.
Approved engineering data - The contractor has engineering data that has been
approved by the cognizant DoD activity and indicates that the proposed packaging
design will successfully meet the requirements of the contract.
d.
Multiapplication containers - Items meet the weight, dimensional and fragility

requirements of table C.IV and are packed in the appropriate multiapplication
container.
e.
Contractor shipping data - The contractor has historical shipping data confirming
adequate protection was provided to similar items using the same or equivalent
packaging.
5.7 Quality assurance provisions. Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase
order, the contractor is responsible for the performance of all quality assurance requirements as
specified in Appendix G (see 6.4).
6. NOTES
(This section contains information of a general or explanatory nature which may be helpful, but is
not mandatory.)
6.1 Acquisition requirements. Acquisition documents must specify the following:
a.
Title, number, revision and date of this standard.
a.
Level of military packing required (see 3.10 and 5.3).
6.2 Issue of DoDISS. When this standard is used in acquisition, the applicable issue of
the DoDISS should be cited in the solicitation (see 2.2.1 and 2.3).
6.3 Associated Data Item Descriptions (DIDs). This standard is cited in DoD 5010.12-L,
Acquisition Management Systems and Data Requirements Control List (AMSDL), as the source
document for the following DIDs. When it is necessary to obtain the data, the applicable DIDs
must be listed on the Contract Data Requirements List (DD Form 1423), except where the DoD
Federal Acquisition Regulation Supplement exempts the requirement for a DD Form 1423.
24
MIL-STD-2073-1D
Reference paragraph
DID Number
4.1
DI-PACK-80120
Preservation and Packing Data
4.1
DI-PACK-80121
Special Packing Instructions
C.5.1.2/H.3.1
DI-PACK-80683
Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS)
C.5.1.2/H.3.3.1.1
DI-PACK-80684
Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS)

Data Input
F.3.2
DI-PACK-81059
Performance Oriented Packaging (POP) Test

Report
DID title
The above DIDs were current as of the date of this standard. The current issue of the AMSDL
must be researched to ensure that only current and approved DIDs are cited on the DD Form
1423.
6.4 Testing facilities. The Government contracting activity's invitation for bid (IFB) or
request for quote (RFQ) should include requirements that the bidder/contractor state that he has
the necessary facilities and capabilities of performing all or part of the testing required or that he
will subcontract that which he is unable to perform to an outside packaging concern with the
necessary facilities and identify the specific taskings.
6.5 Changes in methods of preservation designations. The following are the current and
superseded MIL-P-116 method of preservation designators:
25
MIL-STD-2073-1D
Method of Preservation Designators

In MIL-STD-2073-1C
In MIL-P-116J
and 1D
I
20
IA
40
IA-5
45
IA-6
-IA-8
41
IA-13
44
IA-14
42
IA-15
-IA-16
43
IC
30
IC-1
33
IC-2
32
IC-3
31
IC-4
-IC-7
-IC-9
-IC-10
-II
50
IIa
53
IIb
52
IIc
51
IId
55
IIe
-IIf
54
III
10
Remarks
Deleted by MIL-STD-2073-1C
6.6 Subject term (keyword) listing.

Cleaning
Containers
Drying
Inspection
Levels of protection
Marking for shipment
Methods of preservation
Packaging code development
Packaging data forms
Packaging design validation provisions

Packaging requirements
Preservation
Preservatives
Procedural requirements
Quality assurance
Quantity per unit pack
Testing
26
MIL-STD-2073-1D
6.7 Copies of regulations. Copies of AFJMAN24-204/DLAM 4145.3/TM 38250/NAVSUP PUB 505/MCO P4030.19 should be available from the applicable system program
office or the USAF Material Commands hazardous material bulletin board on the Internet World
Wide Web.
6.8 Supersession. In addition to the document listed on the front cover, this standard also
has superseded the following documents:
MIL-P-116
MIL-STD-726
MIL-STD-794
MIL-STD-834
MIL-STD-1510
MIL-STD-2073-2 MIL-P-14232
-
Preservation, Methods of.

Packaging Requirement Codes.
Parts and Equipment, Procedures for Packaging of.
Packaging Data Forms, Instructions for Preparation and Use
of.
Container Design Retrieval System, Procedures for Use of.
Packaging Requirement Codes.
Parts, Equipment and Tools for Army Material, Packaging of.
6.9 Changes from previous issue. Marginal notations are not used in this revision to identify
changes with respect to the previous issue due to the extent of the changes.
27
MIL-STD-2073-1D
TABLE I. Approximate fragility factors.
15 G's or less
Some inertial guidance platforms and space vehicles.
16 - 24 G's
Missile guidance systems, precision aligned test equipment, gyros, some inertial guidance
platforms.
25 - 39 G's
Mechanically shock-mounted instruments (shock mounts secured prior to packaging provided for
in-service use only), vacuum tube electronics equipment.
40 59 G's
Aircraft accessories such as constant speed drives; electric typewriters, most solid state
electronics equipment, oscilloscopes, computer components.
60 84 G's
TV receivers, aircraft accessories such as generators, starters; some solid state electronics
equipment, some circuit cards and some terminal boards.
85 - 110 G's
Refrigerators, appliances, some electromechanical equipment, some circuit cards, air duct hoses,
attenuators, cable assemblies, some capacitors, gears, housings, receivers, couplers, some
resistors, some terminal boards.
110 + Gs
Machinery, aircraft structural parts such as landing gear, control surfaces, hydraulic equipment,
washers, latch pins, plates, screw brackets, bushings, gaskets, cable assemblies, some capacitors,
coupling cover drive discs, fittings, some resistors, rings, rollers, shafts, supports.
28
29
42 and
52
41 and
51
33
31 and
32
Method
of
Preservation
F
E
E
E
III
III
I
E
II
I
C
SF
BS
SF
B9
B3
SE
BS
BV
B2
SD
BE
BL
MIL-B-117 Reference
Unit
Cont.
Type Class Style
Pkg.
Code
MIL-PRF-131
MIL-PRF-131
MIL-PRF-131
MIL-PRF-131 and
MIL-PRF-22191
MIL-PRF-81705
II
I
II
II
III
I or II
Type
MIL-PRF-22191
MIL-PRF-131
MIL-B-121
MIL-B-121 and
MIL-PRF-22191
MIL-PRF-22191
MIL-B-121
MIL-PRF-22191
or A-A-3174
Specification
A
-
Grade
1
1 or 2
1 or 2
1
1 or 2
1 or 2
1 or 2
1
Class
Characteristics
Watervaporproof; greaseproof; opaque
Watervaporproof; electrostatic protective; opaque

(Method 41 only)
Watervaporproof; greaseproof; one side opaque,

other side transparent
Watervaporproof; greaseproof; transparent
Waterproof; greaseproof; opaque
Waterproof; greaseproof; one side opaque, other

side transparent
Waterproof; greaseproof; transparent
Waterproof; greaseproof; opaque
Waterproof; transparent
Unit Container Bag Material
TABLE II. Method of preservation vs. unit container bag material cross reference to MIL-B-117.
MIL-STD-2073-1D
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
A.1 SCOPE. This appendix provides direction for the development of detailed military
packaging requirements in accordance with the figure 1 decision chart referenced in 4.1. This
appendix also provides information on:
a. use of procedural packaging specifications (see A.3)
b. packaging of hazardous material (see A.4)
c. categorization (see A.5.3) (see tables A.I, A.II, and A.III)
d. selecting preservation methods (see table A.I)
e. development of predetermined packaging codes (see table A.IV)
f. formatting coded data (see table A.IV and figure A.1)
g. computation of weight and cube of packaging materials (see table A.V)
This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended
for compliance.
A.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
A.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections A.3 through
A.5 of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list,
document users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements documents cited in
sections A.3 through A.5 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.
A.2.2 Government documents.
A.2.2.1 Specifications and standards. The following specifications and standards form a
30
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
SPECIFICATIONS
FEDERAL
VV-L-800
PPP-B-140
PPP-B-2920
PPP-C-795
PPP-C-2020
PPP-H-1581
PPP-P-40
PPP-P-1132
PPP-P-1136
PPP-T-360
- Lubricating Oil, General Purpose, Preservative (WaterDisplacing, Low Temperature).

- Batteries, Storage, Industrial, Automotive, Aircraft and
Navy Portable; Packaging of.
- Boilers and Related Equipment, Packaging of.
- Cushioning Material, Packaging (Flexible Closed Cell
Plastic Film for Long Shipping Cycle Applications).
- Chemicals, Liquid, Dry, and Paste: Packaging of.
- Hardware (Fasteners and Related Items), Packaging of.
- Preservation and Packing of Hand Tools; Tools and Tool
Accessories for Power Driven, Metal and Woodworking
Machinery.
- Packaging of Woolen, Worsted and Wool Blend
(Synthetic Fiber; Cotton) Fabrics.
- Packaging of Coated (Plastic; Rubber) and Laminated
Fabrics.
- Time Measuring Instruments: Packaging of.
MILITARY
MIL-V-3
MIL-DTL-4
MIL-E-75
MIL-S-196
MIL-P-197
MIL-P-2845
MIL-C-3131
MIL-PRF-3150
- Valves, Fittings, and Flanges (Except for Systems

Indicated Herein) (Non-Aircraft); Packaging of.
- Tires and Inner Tubes; Packaging of.
- Electron Tubes, Packaging of.
- Support Items, Accessories, and Kits, Mechanical;
Packaging of.
- Packaging of Bearings, Antifriction, Associated Parts and
Subassemblies.
- Propulsion Systems, Boat and Ship; Main Shafting,
Propellers, Bearings, Gauges, Special Tools, and
Associated Repair Parts; Packaging of.
- Cordage; Packaging of.
- Lubricating Oil, Preservative, Medium.
31
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
MIL-M-3184
MIL-C-3993
MIL-P-5610
MIL-P-6063
MIL-PRF-6081
MIL-PRF-6085
MIL-C-6529
MIL-PRF-7808
MIL-PRF-7870
MIL-W-10430
MIL-C-11796
MIL-C-12000
MIL-L-14362
MIL-PRF-16173
MIL-E-16298
MIL-P-16789
MIL-E-17555
MIL-P-17667
MIL-S-19491
MIL-PRF-21260
MIL-P-23199
- Machinery: Deck and Vehicle Mounted With Associated

Equipment and Provisioned (Repair Parts) Items;
Packaging of.
- Copper and Copper-Base Alloy Mill Products; Packaging
of.
- Parachute Assemblies and Subassemblies, Packaging and
Packing of.
- Packaging of Batteries, Storage, Charged and Dry
Uncharged and Moist, General Specification for.
- Lubricating Oil, Jet Engine.
- Lubricating Oil: Instrument, Aircraft, Low Volatility.
- Corrosion Preventive, Aircraft Engine.
- Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Synthetic Base.
- Lubricating Oil: General Purpose, Low Temperature.
- Welding Rods and Electrodes; Packaging of.
- Corrosion Preventive Compound, Petrolatum, Hot
Application.
- Cable, Cord, and Wire, Electric; Packaging of.
- Lumber: Unitizing and Loading of
- Corrosion Preventive Compound, Solvent Cutback,
Cold-Application.
- Electric Machines Having Rotating Parts, Accessories
and Associated Support Items: Packaging of.
- Pumps (Including Prime Movers and Support Items);
Packaging of.
- Electronic and Electrical Equipment, Accessories, and
Provisioned Items (Repair Parts); Packaging of.
- Paper, Wrapping, Chemically Neutral (Non-Corrosive).
- Semiconductor Devices, Packaging of.
- Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine,
Preservative and Break-In.
- Packaging and Packing Requirements for Special Purpose
Components and Repair Parts.
32
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
MIL-PRF-23827
MIL-S-28786
MIL-C-39028
MIL-R-39032
MIL-L-46010
MIL-H-46170
MIL-C-55330
MIL-M-55565
MIL-PRF-81322
MIL-G-81559
MIL-PRF-83282
- Grease, Aircraft and Instrument, Gear and Actuator

Screw, NATO Code Number G-354, Metric.
- Switches, Electrical and Fiber Optic, Packaging of.
- Capacitors, Packing of.
- Resistors, Packaging of.
- Lubricant, Solid Film, Heat Cured, Corrosion Inhibiting.
- Hydraulic Fluid, Rust Inhibited, Fire Resistant, Synthetic
Hydrocarbon Base.
- Connectors, Electrical and Fiber Optic, Packaging of.
- Microcircuits, Packaging of.
Grease, Aircraft, General Purpose, Wide Temperature
Range.
- Gyroscope Assemblies and Attitude and Directional
Reference Instruments for Aircraft; Packaging of.
- Hydraulic Fluid, Fire Resistant, Synthetic Hydrocarbon
Base, Aircraft, Metric, NATO Code Number H-537.
STANDARDS
MILITARY
MIL-STD-290
MIL-STD-758
- Packaging of Petroleum and Related Products.

- Packaging Procedures for Submarine Support Items.
(Unless otherwise indicated, copies of the above documents are available from the
Standardization Documents Order Desk, 700 Robbins Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA
19111-5094).
A.2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications. The following other
Government documents form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless
otherwise specified, the issues are those cited in the solicitation.
33
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
29 CFR
40 CFR
49 CFR
Labor.
Transportation.

A.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this
ASTM-B660
ASTM-D5118
Aluminum and Magnesium Products, Packaging/Packing of,

Standard Practices for (DoD adopted).
Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959).
INTERNATIONAL DOCUMENTS
INTERNATIONAL AIR TRANSPORT ASSOCIATION (IATA)
Dangerous Goods Regulations
INTERNATIONAL MARITIME ORGANIZATION (IMO)
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code.
(These publications are normally available from the organizations that prepare or distribute
the documents. They may also be available in or through libraries or other informational services
and from commercial booksellers.)
34
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
A.3 USE OF EXISTING PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS.
A.3.1 Application. If adequate military packaging requirements have already been
developed for the item, these requirements shall be used. If these requirements are in the form of
a procedural specification, same shall be documented in accordance with E.4.1.1. Available
procedural packaging specifications are listed by commodity in table A.VI.
A.4 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL.
A.4.1 General. Packaging and marking for hazardous material shall comply with
applicable requirements for performance packaging contained in the following documents:
International Air Transport Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG)
Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29, Title 40 and Title 49
Joint Service Regulation AFJMAN24-204/TM38-250/NAVSUPPUB 505/MCO

P4030.19/DLAM 4145.3 (for military air shipments).
A.4.2 Hazardous material package testing. Testing of hazardous material packaging shall
be conducted as specified in Appendix F.
A.4.3 Hazardous material shipment documentation. All shipments shall be supported by
documentation attesting to the date and the test results obtained from performance packaging
testing. The shipper, if not a self-certifier, shall be responsible for assuring that third party
sources providing performance testing services are, in fact, registered with the Department of
Transportation. The shipper's signed certification that the packaged configuration meets
applicable requirements shall be incorporated on the DD Form 250, Materiel Inspection and
Receiving Report, or other related acceptance document if the DD Form 250 is not used. All
certificates and reports shall be available for inspection by authorized Government representatives
for a period of three years.
A.5 MILITARY PACKAGING CODE DEVELOPMENT
A.5.1 Item classification. All materiel to be packaged can be classified into one of three
groups of items: common, selective or special.
35
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
a.
Common items can be categorized by a specific set of chemical, physical, and other
characteristics for which complete packaging details are predetermined and are
listed in table A.IV using Appendix J coding. These items are characteristically
small, rugged items.
b.
Selective items cannot appropriately use predetermined packaging data and yet do
not require a drawing, sketch, illustration, or narrative type instruction to specify
packaging details. These packaging details can be specified by Appendix J codes,
supplemented by in-the-clear information as required.
c.
Special items have peculiar characteristics such as weight, configuration,

complexity, fragility, or other considerations that preclude their being grouped as
common or selective. An item is considered special if drawings, sketches,
illustrations, narrative type instructions or a reusable container are required to
specify packaging details.
A.5.2 Item characteristics. Knowledge of the physical and chemical characteristics and
significant features of the item are required to classify items into groups. These characteristics are
item composition, item surface chemistry, criticality of the surface, item compatibility with
preservatives and such physical factors as size, weight, and fragility. Knowledge of these
characteristics leads to the development of a category code for an item.
A.5.3 Categorization. Tables A.I, A.II, and A.III provide the information for developing
category codes. The category code for common items leads to the predetermined packaging
codes in table A.IV. The category code for selective items indicates that a non-predetermined
packaging code must be established. The category code for special group items indicates that a
Special Packaging Instruction (SPI) or stock numbered reusable container is required.
A.5.3.1 Category code. The category code is a four-digit code derived from tables A.I,
A.II, and A.III. This code provides a means to concisely define the characteristics of the item
being packaged with respect to the following attributes:
a.
First category The chemical and physical characteristics (table A.I) of the item to
be considered in the selection of the proper basic method of preservation (two
digits).
36
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
b.
Second category The weight, size and non-operational fragility characteristics

(table A.II) of the item to be considered in the selection of the proper strength
characteristics of a package (one digit).
c.
Third category Preservative requirements (see table A.III) for the item (one digit).
A.5.3.2 Category code development. Items shall be categorized in the order indicated in
A.5.3.1 by extracting category code digits associated with the item's applicable characteristics
from tables A.I, A.II, and A.III. Categories represent the summation of pertinent chemical,
physical and other characteristics that significantly influence the packaging required for adequate
protection of items. The designation of the appropriate characteristics of each category, in the
sequence as listed, provides four-digit identification that permits the grouping of various items.
These groupings, which may contain items dissimilar in function, have the same characteristics
and therefore require the same method of preservation. A code "Z in any of the four positions of
the category code will indicate that the item is selective or special. If no "Zs" appear in the code,
then the item is common.
A.5.3.2.1 First category physical and chemical characteristics. The first category
examines those characteristics that determine the method of preservation needed to afford the
required protection. These are:
a.
Item composition/properties.
b.
Criticality of item (see 3.6).
c.
Compatibility with preservative.
The chemical and physical characteristics of items as applied to table A.I lead to determination of
the first two digits of the category code and the appropriate basic method of preservation. A
code ZZ will indicate the item is selective or special.
A.5.3.2.1.1 Item composition/properties criteria. This determination is made by physical
examination of the item or, if necessary, by researching the design definition of the item.
A.5.3.2.1.2 Critical item criteria. Items meeting one or more of the criteria listed in 3.6
shall be considered as having critical surfaces or application as listed in table A.I.
37
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
A.5.3.2.1.3 Contact preservative criteria. Items susceptible to deterioration, such as iron
and steel, require preservative unless prohibited by other factors, such as:
a.
Preservative application would damage the item.
b.
Preservative would be excessively difficult to remove.
c.
Presence of any residual preservative would be incompatible with operational fluids,

oils or greases and would potentially cause malfunction during operation.
A.5.3.2.2 Second category weight/size/fragility. This category establishes definitive

criteria for weight/size/fragility grouping of items. These criteria determine the required
cushioning for the item and, therefore, have direct influence on the container to be used. It
provides a means of separating those items which will permit the use of a bag-type container from
those requiring containers of greater strength or other desired qualities. Category codes based on
weight/size/fragility limitations are found in table A.II. A Code Z will indicate that the item is
selective or special.
A.5.3.2.3 Third category preservatives. This category establishes applicable contact
preservative codes. The appropriate codes of table A.III will be shown as the third category. If
the required preservative is not listed in the table, assign a "Z" code. A code "Z" will indicate that
the item is either selective or special.
A.5.4 Military packaging codes for common items. If categorization of an item can be
accomplished by a four digit code without resorting to a "Z" code, the item is a "common" item.
The correct packaging for common items has been developed by DoD and is thus predetermined.
This predetermined data is listed in table A.IV and must be used for the appropriate four digit
categorization for all common items. Sequencing format for this predetermined data is defined in
figure A.1.
A.5.5 Military packaging codes for selective items. Specific codes shall be developed to
define packaging for selective items using appropriate tables in Appendix J. Selection of the
proper codes shall be based on the unique protection required for each item. The sequence for
developed packaging codes for selective items is also defined in figure A.1. Supplemental data
may be required to completely define the packaging. When the options provided in the Method of
Preservation description must be definitized, appropriate specific codes of Appendix J shall be
used. Otherwise, code "XX" is sufficient to define the MOP.
38
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
A.5.6 Recording of coded requirements. Developed military packaging codes shall be
recorded in accordance with the requirements contained in Appendix E.
A.6 CONTAINER SELECTION. Acceptable containers and their selection criteria are detailed
in Appendix C.
A.7 FORMULAS. Table A.V contains formulas for calculating the weight and sizes of barrier
materials, containers, wraps and cushioning.
A.8 PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION.
A.8.1 Common items. Packaging design validation tests are not required for common
items.
A.8.2 Selective and special items. See 5.6 for requirements.
39
METHOD OF PRESERVATION
40
LC
ASTM-D5118,
TYPE CF; CLASS
WEATHERRRESISTANT
FIBERBOARD BOX
ED
3/4 IN CUSHIONING
FIGURE A.1. Format for interpretation of packaging code sequence.
PPP-C-795, CLASS 1, CELLULAR PLASTIC FILM CUSHIONING
MIL-P-17667, CHEMICALLY NEUTRAL WRAPPING PAPER
EA
J.VII
J.VI
J.V
J.IV
WRAPPING MATERIAL
0/0/
11 12
10
6
7
CUSHIONING AND DUNNAGE
NO REQUIREMENT
J.III
J.II
CLEANING PROCEDURE
42
J.I
&
J.Ia
PRESERVATIVE MATERIAL
CUSHIONING THICKNESS
ANY APPLICABLE
PROCESS IN ACCORDANCE WITH
5.2.1
1
2
UNIT CONTAINER
EXAMPLE:
METHOD 42
SEE TABLES IN
APPENDIX J
CORRESPONDING
TABLES IN
APPENDIX J
DIGIT POSITION
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.I. Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination.
BARE METAL ITEMS
Item Composition/Properties
(See Note 1)
Iron, steel (bare or black oxide
coated); includes all stainless
varieties except those having
minimum compositions of 17Cr-7Ni
Magnesium (bare or chromated)
Aluminum, Babbitt, beryllium, brass,
bronze, cadmium, cobalt, copper,
copper alloys, lead, Monel, nickel,
rough castings, silver, sintered alloys,
stainless steel, titanium, tin, zinc
Ferrous and non-ferrous combined
Contact
Preservative
Prohibited
16
Basic
Method of
Preservation
(See Note
2)
20
40
30
50
30
50
40
10/See
Note 3
30
18
20
20/
21
ZZ
50
30
Has Critical
Surfaces or
Application
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
None of above
1st and
2nd Digit
of
Category
Code
0/1
0/3
0/5
0/7
0/9
11
13
15
Note 1: Unless otherwise specified, when the material described in the Item Composition/Properties
column is combined with a non-metallic material, package to the requirement of the metal
present, contact preservative prohibited, and use the appropriate metal category code.
Note 2: Specific techniques to accomplish these basic methods are available and may be used as
appropriate, except for the predetermined codes for common items which are defined in
table A.IV.
Note 3: If combined with a non-metallic material, package to the requirement of the non-metal
present and use the corresponding non-metal category code.
Note 4: Any functional lubricant not requiring removal may be applied to the unsealed equipment.
Note 5: Package to protect item against EMI and ESD damage (not a common item).
41
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.I. Physical and chemical characteristics category code determination - Continued.
PLATED COATED ITEMS
(See Note 1)
Contact
Preservative
Prohibited
Has Critical
Surfaces or
Application
1st and
2nd Digit
of
Category
Code
Ferrous metals fully plated with

chromium, copper, nickel, silver, tin,
gold, iridium, osmium, palladium,
rhodium, ruthenium, zinc, cadmium
or terne
22
Non-ferrous metals that have been

plated
Iron or steel which has a phosphate
coating, copper or brass which has
chromate or black oxide finish over
entire surface
Anodized aluminum; zinc or zincplated iron or steel; zinc alloy
castings; alclad aluminum
Anodized aluminum combined with
passivated corrosion resistant steel
Metals that are painted, varnished,
lacquered or enameled
Porous metal, oil impregnated
None of above
24
X
25
Basic
Method of
Preservation
(See Note
2)
30
10/See
Note 3
20
38
10/See
Note 3
30
20
30/See
Note 3
30
20
10/See
Note 3
30
40/
10
41
42
ZZ
27
X
X
28
30/
32
X
X
33
35
37
42
10/See
Note 3
30
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
NONMETALS
(See Note 1)
Plastics or plastic-fiber composites

Natural or synthetic rubber (other
than shelf-life items)
Leather
Optical glass, quartz, mica and
assemblies using these as component
parts
Carbon, graphite, asbestos, ceramics
and glass (other than optical)
Paper
Wood or cork
Cordage and items made of cloth
(includes shelf-life clothing)
Textiles
None of above
Contact
Preservative
Prohibited
X
X
X
X
X
X
1st and
2nd Digit
of
Category
Code
43
44
45
46
47
48
Basic
Method of
Preservation
(See Note
2)
10
30
30
30
10
30
49
40
50/
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
ZZ
10
30
30
30
10
30
10
30
30
Has Critical
Surfaces or
Application
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
43
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
COMPLETE ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENTS, RADIO AND RADAR SETS,
ELECTRONIC ASSEMBLIES, OTHER COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT
(See Note 1)
Assembly may contain any material
and is sealed; external surfaces need
no further protection against
corrosion
and is sealed; external surfaces need
protection against corrosion
and is not sealed.
None of above
Contact
Preservative
Prohibited
Has Critical
Surfaces or
Application
1st and
2nd Digit
of
Category
Code
Basic
Method of
Preservation
(See Note
2)
60/
10
61
40
62
50
ZZ
44
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
RADIO AND RADAR, OTHER COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT, ELECTRONIC
ASSEMBLIES, SUBASSEMBLIES AND COMPONENT PARTS (NOT SEALED)
(See Note 1)
Contact
Preservative
Prohibited
Has Critical
Surfaces or
Application
X
Steel, iron and magnesium
Electrical nonmetallic combination
with gold plating
Optical glass, quarts and mica
(includes plug type electronic
connectors, resistors, capacitors,
etc.)
Electrostatic discharge, electromagnetic, magnetic or radioactivity
sensitive devices or parts
Copper, bronze, brass, beryllium
Gold, silver, platinum and iridium
and other precious metals
Parts move on bearings (any
material)
None of above
X
X
X
X
X
X
1st and
2nd Digit
of
Category
Code
64
65
67
30
68
30
69
40
ZZ
40/See
Note 5
72
40
73
40
74
50
ZZ
45
Basic
Method of
Preservation
(See Note
2)
40
50/See
Note 4
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
ELECTRICAL-MECHANICAL ASSEMBLIES
Has Critical
Surfaces or
Application
1st and
2nd Digit
of
Category
Code
Basic
Method of
Preservation
(See Note
2)
(See Note 1)
Contact
Preservative
Prohibited
Bare steel, iron, or magnesium; parts

electrically balanced or calibrated
77
50
X
X
80/
81
83
84
85
ZZ
40
40
50/See
Note 4
30
10
End product may contain any

material (not sealed)
End product may contain any
material (sealed)
None of above apply
X
X
46
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.II. Weight/size/and non-operational fragility category code determination.
Item weight and dimensions

2.0 lbs or less; one dimension 2 inches or less, other dimensions not
greater than 24 inches (see Note 1)
2.0 lbs or less; all dimensions over 2 inches but not greater than 24
inches (see Note 2)
Over 2.0 lbs to 5.0 lbs; all dimensions not greater than 24 inches
0.25 lbs or less; one dimension 2 inches or less, other dimensions
not greater than 24 inches
Over 0.25 lbs to 2.0 lbs; one dimension 2 inches or less, other
dimensions not greater than 24 inches
2.0 lbs or less; all dimensions over 2 inches, but not greater than 24
inches
Over 10.0 lbs regardless of dimensions
Any weight and one dimension greater than 24 inches
Any weight, any dimensions
Note 1.
Note 2.
Degree of
fragility
Category
Code
Above 110 G's
Above 110 Gs
Above 110 G's

Above 110 G's
Above 110 G's
C
D
E
85 to 110 G's
85 to 110 G's
85 to 110 G's
85 to 110 G's
85 to 110 G's
85 to 110 G's
Any degree of
fragility
Any degree of
fragility
Less than 85 G's
J
K
L
Z
Z
Z
Items which have irregularities or protrusions which require cushioning to protect

the package shall be coded F or G.
Items which have irregularities or protrusions which require cushioning to protect
the package shall be coded H.
47
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.III Contact preservative category code determination.
Description
Uses
Asphalt compound
dissolved in
petroleum solvent;
dries to hard film
in 4 hours
Amber colored
compound diluted
in solvent; dries
soft; mixes with
oil; applied cold
Protect noncritical
metal items in outdoor
storage; used on bolts,
chains and similar items
Corresponding
Appendix
J Code
0/1
Extended under cover

protection to exterior
surfaces of machinery,
bearings and
instruments; used
outdoors for limited
periods only
Bearing preservation;
machined surfaces that
are brushable
0/2
0/6
Small arms and

automatic weapons
protection; components
of internal combustion
engines
Reciprocating sparkignition and
compression-ignition
engines preservation;
also all types of ground
equipment; oils are
operational and need
not be drained
0/9
10/
Preservative
Specification
MIL-PRF16173
Grade 1,
Hard Film
MIL-PRF16173
Grade 2,
Soft Film
MIL-C11796
Class 3, Soft Petrolatum base

Film
corrosion
preventive; dries
soft and greasy
One grade
Light, low
only
viscosity oil
containing rust
inhibitors
VV-L-800
MIL-PRF21260
Grade, Type
or Class
Type I,
Grades 10,
30 or 50
Light, medium or
heavy viscosity oil
with additives
48
Category
Code
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.III. Contact preservative category code determination - Continued
Preservative
Specification
MIL-PRF23827
Grade, Type
or Class
Description
Uses
One grade
only
Smooth
homogenous mixgelling agent
MIL-PRF7808
One type
only
Synthetic based
lubricating oil
MIL-H46170
Type I or II
MIL-PRF6085
One grade
only
MIL-PRF81322
Grade A
MIL-PRF16173
Grade 4,
transparent
film
Synthetic hydrocarbon base

hydraulic fluids
Synthetic oil with
additives for antioxidation and
corrosion
protection
Wide temperature
range liquid
lubricant (grease)
Solvent dispersed,
amber colored,
non-tacky film
Ball, roller and needle

bearings, gears,
electronic items and
aircraft control systems
Operating lubricating
oil for aircraft turbine
engines, helicopter
transmissions and
accessory equipment
Intended for use in
tank recoil mechanism
and hydraulic systems
Aircraft instruments
and electronic
equipment
Operating lubricant for

aircraft related
equipment
General purpose indoor
and limited outdoor
protection where
transparency is desired
49
Corresponding
Appendix
J Code
11
33
15
17
12
19
Category
Code
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
Preservative
Specification
MIL-PRF83282
One grade
only
Hydraulic fluid,
fire resistant,
synthetic hydrocarbon base
MIL-PRF7870
One grade
only
MIL-PRF16173
Grade 3,
Water
Displacing,
Soft Film
Clear transparent
lubricating oil
suitable for low
temperature
operations
Solvent dispersed
compound that
deposits a thin
non-drying film
that displaces
water
MIL-PRF3150
One grade
only
Grade, Type
or Class
Description
Corresponding
Appendix
J Code
65
50/
Used where fresh or

salt water displacing is
required; interior
machinery surfaces or
material under cover
0/3
Lubricating and
preserving internal
surfaces of machine
assemblies (except
combustion engines);
also for small arms and
artillery
0/7
Uses
Intended for use from
-40 to +205C in
automatic pilots, shock
absorbers, air
compressor gear boxes,
brakes, flap-control
mechanisms, missile
hydraulic servocontrolled systems and
other hydraulic systems
using synthetic sealing
material
General purpose
Highly refined
lubricating oil with
corrosion inhibitor
added
50
Category
Code
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
Preservative
Specification
MIL-C6529
Grade, Type
or Class
Type II
MIL-C6529
Type III
---
---
MIL-L46010
Type I or II
MIL-PRF6081
Grade 1010
---
---
---
---
Description
For preserving
reciprocating engines
and equipment
Corresponding
Appendix
J Code
31
For preserving turbojet

engines
32
----
49
30/
51
89
XX
Uses
Ready mixed
material for
reciprocating
engines
Ready mixed
material for jet
aircraft engines
Vendors
protective grease
or oil coating
Solid film lubricant
intended to reduce
wear and prevent
galling, corrosion
and seizure of
materials
Intended for use on

aluminum, aluminum
alloys, copper and
copper alloys, steel and
stainless steel, titanium
and chromium and
nickel bearing surfaces
Refined petroleum Used whenever jet
product containing engine oil is required
oxidation inhibitors and for the
and pour point
preservation of
depressants
interiors of fuel cells
and fuel systems
Preserve with
--normal operating
lubricant
See Method of
--Preservation code
for this
requirement
51
Category
Code
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.III. Contact preservative category code determination - Continued.
Preservative
Specification
Special
requirement
No requirement
Grade, Type
or Class
Description
Uses
Category
Code
---
---
---
---
---
---
0/
52
Corresponding
Appendix
J Code
Appropriate
preservative
material
code from
Appendix
J
0/0/
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.IV. Predetermined military packaging data for common items.
Category Codes
Chemical and physical
characteristics (from
table A.I)
Weight/size/fragility
(from table A.II)
Contact Preservative
(from table A.III)
Packaging code
METHOD 10
15,24,27,37,40/,41,43,
47,50/,54,56,60/, or 85
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
10/10/0/0/0/0/0/0/A1
10/10/0/0/0/0/0/0/ED
10l10/0/0/0/NAAED
10/10/0/0/0/NABED
10/10/0/0/0/NACED
10/10/0/0/0/NAAA1
10/10/0/0/0/NABA1
10/10/0/0/0/NABED
10/10/0/0/0/NACED
10/10/0/0/0/NADED
10/10/0/0/0/NAFED
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
20/1**GH0/0/0/BD
20/1**GH0/0/0/ED
20/1**GHNAAED
20/1**GHNABED
20/1**GHNACED
20/1**GHNAABD
20/1**GHNABBD
20/1**GHNABED
20/1**GHNACED
20/1**GHNADED
20/1**GHNAFED
METHOD 20
0/1,18,25,30/, or 35
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
* = Category code for applicable preservative.

** = Applicable preservative code from table J.III.
53
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.IV. Predetermined military packaging data for common items - Continued.
Category Codes
table A.I)
(from table A.II)
(from table A.III)
Packaging code
METHOD 30 (WITHOUT PRESERVATIVE)

0/5,16,22,28,32,33,38,
42,44,45,46,48,51,52,
53,55,57,58, or 68
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
3110/0/0/0/0/0/0/XX
3210/0/0/0/0/0/0/XX
3210/0/0/0/NAAXX
3210/0/0/0/NABXX
3210/0/0/0/NACXX
3110/0/0/0/NAAXX
3110/0/0/0/NABXX
3210/0/0/0/NABXX
3210/0/0/0/NACXX
3210/0/0/0/NADXX
3210/0/0/0lNAFXX
METHOD 30 (WITH PRESERVATIVE)

0/9,21,67, or 84
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

54
331**GH0/0/0/XX
321**GH0/0/0/XX
321**GHNAAXX
321**GHNABXX
321**GHNACXX
331**GHNAAXX
331**GHNABXX
321**GHNABXX
321**GHNACXX
321**GHNADXX
321**GHNAFXX
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
Category Codes
table A.I)
(from table A.II)
(from table A.III)
Packaging code

13,49,64,69,72,73, or
80/
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
4110/0/0/0/0/0/0/XX
4210/0/0/0/0/0/0/XX
4210/0/0/0/NAAXX
4210/0/0/0/NABXX
4210/0/0/0/NACXX
4110/0/0/0/NAAXX
4110/0/0/0/NABXX
4210/0/0l0/NABXX
4210/0/0/0/NACXX
4210/0/0/0/NADXX
4210/0/0/0/NAFXX

0/3,61, or 81
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

55
411**GH0/0/0/XX
421**GH0/0/0/XX
421**GHNAAXX
421**GHNABXX
421**GHNACXX
411**GHNAAXX
411**GHNABXX
421**GHNABXX
421**GHNACXX
421**GHNADXX
421**GHNAFXX
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
Category Codes
table A.I)
(from table A.II)
(from table A.III)
Packaging code

0/7,11,20/,65,74,77, or
83
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
0/
5110/0/0/0/0/0/0/XX
5210/0/0/0/0/0/0/XX
5210/0/0/0/NAAXX
5210/0/0/0/NABXX
5210/0/0/0/NACXX
5110/0/0/0/NAAXX
5110/0/0/0/NABXX
5210/0/0/0/NABXX
5210/0/0/0/NACXX
5210/0/0/0/NADXX
5210/0/0/0/NAFXX

62
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*
*

56
511**GH0/0/0/XX
521**GH0/0/0/XX
521**GHNAAXX
521**GHNABXX
521**GHNACXX
511**GHNAAXX
511**GHNABXX
521**GHNABXX
521**GHNACXX
521**GHNADXX
521**GHNAFXX
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.V. Formulas for material weight and size calculations.
Abbreviations are used extensively in the following formulas. The key to these abbreviations is as
follows:
CD
D
HI
IHC
ILC
IWC
L
LB
LBP
LC
LEP
LI
LSP
LW
NoT
OHC
OLC
OWC
TBP
TC
TEP
TF
TSP
W
WB
WBP
WC
WEP
WI
WSP
Wt Con
WtC
WtW
WW
WWT
cushioning density (lbs per cubic inch)

depth of item including wrap, dunnage or container to be enclosed
height of item
inside height of container
inside length of container
inside width of container
length of item including wrap, dunnage or container, if enclosed
length of barrier
length of bottom pad and length of top pad
length of cushioning
length of end pad
length of item
length of side pad
length of wrap
number of thicknesses
outside height of container
outside length of container
outside width of container
thickness of bottom pad and thickness of top pad
thickness of cushioning
thickness of end pad
thickness factor (thickness of container wall)
thickness of side pad
width of item including wrap, dunnage or container to be enclosed
width of barrier
width of bottom pad and width of top pad
width of cushioning
width of end pad
width of item
width of side pad
weight of container (lbs)
weight of cushioning (lbs)
weight of wrap
width of wrap
wrap weight factor (lbs/sq. in.)
NOTE: All dimensions are in inches.

57
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.V. Formulas for material weight and size calculations - Continued.
Material weight and size requirement
Formula
Wrap
a. Compute size of wrap in inches
a. LW = 2WI + 2HI + 2
WW = LI + HI + 1.5
b. Compute weight of wrap in pounds
b. WtW = LW x WW x WWT
Cushioning *
c. Roll Cushioning Formula 1
c. Use formula 1 for roll cushioning;

dimensions in inches
LC = NoT (2WI + 2HI + 1)

WC = LI + HI + 1
d. Use formula 2 for cut cushioning;

dimensions in inches
d. Cut Cushioning Formula 2

Bottom and top pads:
End pads:
LBP = LI
LEP = WI + 2TC
WBP = WI + 2TC
WEP = HI + 2TC
TBP = TC
TEP = TC
Side pads:
LSP = LI
WSP = HI
TSP = TC
e. Compute weight of cushioning in pounds
e. Formula 1
WtC = LC x WC x TC x CD
Formula 2
WtC = [2(LBP x WBP) + 2 (LEP x WEP)
+ 2(LSP x WSP)] x TC x CD
* Item dimensions in this formula must include all wraps, dunnage and containers already
applied to the item.
58
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.V. Formulas for material weight and size calculations - Continued
Material weight and size requirement
Formula
Unit container
f. Compute inside dimensions of container in
inches
f. ILC = LI + 2TC
IWC = WI + 2TC
IHC = HI + 2TC
g. Compute outside dimensions of container in

inches
g. OLC = ILC + 2TF

OWC = IWC + 2TF
*OHC = IHC + 2TF + thickness of skids
(if present)
Note: If container is RSC fiberboard,
replace 2TF with 4TF
h. Compute weight of fiberboard container in

pounds
h. Wt Con = 2 x fiberboard
wt factor (lbs/sq. in.)[(ILC x IWC) + (ILC
x IHC) + (IWC x IHC)(+ 1/2 flap area)] +
no. of skids x wood wt. factor (lbs/sq. in.) x
skid thickness x skid width x skid length +
no. of sleeves x 2 x fiberboard wt. factor
[(ILC x IHC) + (IWC x IHC)]
I. Compute flexible barrier size
i. METHODS 30 and 40
NOTE:
a. Minimum size bag shall be 2-1/2 x 3
inches regardless of formula.
b. After the size has been calculated extend
the dimension of the width to the nearest
inch, except for minimum size bag.
c. Bag sizes may be adjusted to adequately
contain items when automatic packaging
equipment is utilized.
LB = 2W + 2D + 3 inches
WB = L + D + 3 inches
METHOD 50
LB = 2W + 2D + 5 inches
WB = L + D + 5 inches
* Item dimensions in this formula must include all wraps, dunnage and containers already
applied to the item.
59
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.VI. Procedural packaging specifications.
Commodity
Specification
Aluminum
Batteries, storage, general
Batteries, storage, industrial and lead acid
Bearings
Boilers
Cable, electric
Capacitors
Chemicals
Connectors
Copper
Cordage
Electric machines
Electron tubes
Electronic equipment
Engine repair parts
Fabrics, coated
Fabrics, woolen
Fittings and flanges
Gyroscopes
Hardware
Lumber
Machinery, deck and vehicle mounted
Magnesium
Microcircuits
Parachutes
Petroleum products
Propellers, ship
Pumps
Resistors
Semiconductors
Special purpose components and repair parts
Submarine repair parts
Support items
Switches
ASTM-B660
MIL-P-6063
PPP-B-140
MIL-B-197
PPP-B-2920
MIL-C-12000
MIL-C-39028
PPP-C-2020
MIL-C-55330
MIL-C-3993
MIL-C-3131
MIL-E-16298
MIL-E-75
MIL-E-17555
MIL-S-196
PPP-P-1136
PPP-P-1132
MIL-V-3
MIL-G-81559
PPP-H-1581
MIL-L-14362
MIL-M-3184
ASTM-B660
MIL-M-55565
MIL-P-5610
MIL-STD-290
MIL-P-2845
MIL-P-16789
MIL-R-39032
MIL-S-19491
MIL-P-23199
MIL-STD-758
MIL-S-196
MIL-S-28786
60
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX A
TABLE A.VI. Procedural packaging specifications Continued.
Commodity
Specification
Time measuring instruments

Tires and tubes
Tools, hand
Valves
Welding rods
Wire, electric
PPP-T-360
MIL-DTL-4
PPP-P-40
MIL-V-3
MIL-W-10430
MIL-C-12000
61
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX B
FACTORS AND FORMULAE ESTABLISHING MILITARY PACKAGING QUP AND ICQ
B.1 SCOPE. This appendix provides the methods to determine the quantity per unit pack (QUP)
and intermediate container quantity (ICO) for other than hazardous materials, when same is not
specified. QUPs will be developed in consonance with existing instructions for establishment of
Unit of Issue information. QUP for hazardous material shall be determined after consideration of
the user's needs and the restrictions of Title 49 CFR. This appendix is a mandatory part of this
standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance.
B.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
This section is not applicable to this appendix.
B.3 DETERMINATION OF QUP
B.3.1 Repairable items (depot or field level) or items designated Hi-value or Hi-priority.
A QUP of one will be established for all items identified as repairable (depot or field level) or
items designated Hi-value or Hi-priority.
B.3.2 Consumable items.
a.
b.
QUP shall be one for all consumable items with a unit cost of $50.00 or more.
Items of less than $50.00 unit cost may be assigned a QUP of greater than one (1)
when the computation utilizing Formula A or B (see B.3.8) so indicates. However,
the maximum dollar value of the QUP shall not exceed $200.00 for parts applicable
to more than one assembly or $100.00 for parts applicable to only one assembly.
B.3.3 Irregular configuration, delicate or fragile items. The QUP for items of irregular
configuration, delicate or fragile nature, not lending themselves to multiple packs, is one each.
B.3.4 Pairs and sets items. The QUP for items which are furnished in pairs, sets, etc., is
one pair, one set, etc., as applicable.
B.3.5 Items unit packed in accordance with Method 50. The QUP for items which are
unit packed in accordance with Method 50 shall be one.
B.3.6 Kit. A kit will be indicated one each, regardless of the quantity of items contained
therein.
62
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX B
B.3.7 Lumber, raw stock, paints, oils and dope. The factors and formulae contained
herein are not applicable to lumber, raw stock, paints, oils and dope.
B.3.8 Factors and formulae establishing QUP. The following factors and formulae should
be used in determining the quantity per unit pack (QUP).
B.3.8.1 Consumable items having both maintenance and overhaul applications. Formula
A (see B.4.1) shall be used to determine the QUP as follows:
a.
Determine item unit cost.
b.
Sum the factors in the appropriate cost column for Groups I through IV.
c.
Determine whether item is applicable to more than one end assembly or applicable to
only one end assembly. The QUP will be the number in the appropriate column
opposite the above-determined sum of factors.
d.
The QUP for consumer items, office supplies, clothing, commercial hardware, and
similar items can be modified as necessary to assure uniformity and compatibility with
standard commercial packaging.
e.
Delicate or fragile peculiar parts costing $2.50 or less and lending themselves to
multiple packs, with a final sum of factors score of five or more and similar common
parts with a final sum of factors score of four or more will be afforded the next lesser
QUP rather than that normally specified.
f.
In determining QUP for those items for which actual replacement factors are not
available, estimated factors will be used, and the appropriate numerical rate assigned.
B.3.8.2 Consumable items having overhaul applications only. Formula B (see B.4.2) shall
be used to determine the QUP as follows:
a.
Determine quantity required per end assembly.
b.
Sum the factors in the appropriate column for Groups I through IV.
c.
Determine whether item is applicable to more than one end assembly or applicable to
only one end assembly. The QUP will be the number in the appropriate column
opposite the above-determined sum of factors.
63
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX B
d.
In determining QUP for those items for which actual replacement factors are not
available, estimated factors will be used, and the appropriate numerical rate assigned.
64
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX B
B.4 QUANTITY PER UNIT PACK DETERMINATION FORMULAE
B.4.1 Formula A - (For consumable items having both maintenance & overhaul
applications.)
.01
to
.50
.51
to
4.00
Cost per item in dollars

4.01
10.01
to
to
10.00
20.00
GROUP I Cost factor

+4
+3
+2
+1
GROUP II Weight & cube factor
0 to 0.01 cu ft. and
+2
+2
+2
+2
0 to 0.19 lb.
0.02 to 1.00 cu ft. and
+1
+1
+1
+1
0.20 to 1.00 lb.
1.01 to 2.00 cu ft. and
0
0
0
0
1.01 to 2.00 lb.
2.01 to 3.00 cu ft. and
-1
-1
-1
-1
2.01 to 5.00 lb.
Items exceeding 3.00 cu ft. or 5.00 lb. will be packaged in QUP of one each.
GROUP III
Replacement factor (see B.3.8.1.f)
1% thru 20%
-2
-2
-2
-2
21% thru 50%
-1
-1
-1
-1
51% or more
0
0
0
0
GROUP IV Method of preservation factor
Methods 10 and 20
0
0
0
0
Methods 30 and 40
-2
-2
-2
-2
Sum of Factors
0 or less
1
2
3
4
5
6
QUP for parts applicable to more

than one assembly (see B.3.8.1.c)
1
5
10
10
25 (see B.3.8.1.e)
50 (see B.3.8.1.e)
50 (see B.3.8.1.e)
65
20.01
to
35.00
35.01
to
50.00
-2
+2
+2
+1
+1
-1
-1
-2
-1
0
-2
-1
0
0
-2
0
-2
QUP for parts applicable to

only one assembly
1
1
5
5
10
25
50
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX B
B.4.2 Formula B - (For consumable items having overhaul applications only).
GROUP I Quantity required per assembly factor
8 or Over
+6
Quantity required per end assembly

5 to 7
3 to 4
+5
+4
GROUP II Weight & cube factor rates

0 to 0.01 cu ft. &
+2
0 to .19 lb.
0.02 to 1.00 cu ft. &
+1
0.20 to 1.00 lb
1.01 to 2.00 cu ft. &
-5
1.01 to 2.00 lb
2.01 to 3.00 cu ft. &
-6
2.01 to 5.00 lb
Items exceeding 3.00 cu ft. or 5.00 lb. will be packed in QUP of one each.
GROUP III Replacement factor (see B.3.8.2.d)
1% thru 5%
-4
6% thru 20%
-3
21% thru 40%
-2
41% thru 75%
0
76% thru 100%
+1
GROUP IV Method of preservation factor
Methods 10 and 20
0
Methods 30 and 40
-2
Sum of Factors
0 or less
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
QUP for parts applicable to more

than one assembly (see B.3.8.2.c)
1
5
10
10
25
50
50
100
200
500
1 to 2
+2
+2
+2
+2
+1
+1
+1
-4
-4
-2
-5
-5
-3
-4
-3
-2
0
+1
-4
-3
-2
0
+1
-4
-3
-2
0
+1
0
-2
0
-2
0
-2
QUP for parts applicable to

only one assembly
1
1
5
5
10
25
50
50
100*
*Use QUP of 100 each only in instances where more than 100 each of an item is required per end assembly or is
required for multiuse in a shop function where 100 each or more may be consumed at one location in a reasonable
amount of time.
66
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX B
B.5 DETERMINATION OF ICQ
B.5.1 Quantities per intermediate container. Except as otherwise specified herein or
specified by the contract, unit packs requiring intermediate packing shall be packed in quantities
governed by the following:
a.
Maximum of 100 unit packs to the intermediate container.
b.
Maximum net load of 40 pounds.
c.
Maximum size of 1.5 cubic feet with at least two dimensions not exceeding 16 inches.
Table B.I offers a guide to the quantity of unit packs that could be placed in the intermediate
container based on the above criteria.
B.5.2 Intermediate container limitations. Quantities of unit packs prescribed may be
varied under any one of the following conditions:
a.
When the quantity to be shipped to a single destination is less than the established
intermediate quantity, the total quantity shall be placed in a shipping container of a
minimum size to contain the unit packs.
b.
When a contract or order specifies a total quantity that is more than the established
intermediate quantity, but not in multiples thereof, established quantities shall be
packed in the required number of intermediate containers, and the remaining quantity
shall be placed in the smallest container which will accommodate the remaining unit
packs.
67
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX B
TABLE B.I. Guidance for establishing number of unit packs per
intermediate container (see Notes 1 and 2).
Unit packs
per int. container
100
96
92
88
84
80
76
72
68
64
60
56
52
48
44
40
36
32
28
24
20
16
12
8
4
Unit pack weight

(lbs)
.4
.41
.43
.46
.47
.5
.52
.55
.59
.62
.66
.71
.77
.83
.91
1.0
1.11
1.25
1.43
1.66
2.0
2.5
3.33
5.
10.
Unit pack cube

(cu. ft.)
.0150
.0156
.0163
.0170
.0178
.0187
.0197
.0208
.0220
.0234
.0250
.0267
.0288
.0312
.0340
.0375
.0416
.0478
.0535
.0625
.0750
.0937
.125
.187
.375
Note 1
Either the unit pack weight or unit pack cube, whichever is the bottommost entry in its
respective column of the table, is the controlling factor in determining the number of
unit packs per intermediate container (ICQ). When the controlling factor falls between
any two values listed in the appropriate column, the ICQ will be the lesser of the two
corresponding quantities given in the table.
Note 2
The following examples illustrate correct use of the table:

a. If the unit pack weight is .60 pounds and the unit cube in feet is .0175, 64 units
would be placed in the intermediate container.
b. If the unit pack weight is .49 pounds and the unit pack cube in feet is .0265, 56
unit packs would be placed in the intermediate container.
68
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
CONTAINERS
C.1 SCOPE. This appendix provides general requirements for containers used in military
packaging, lists available containers that meet the requirements of this standard, and provides
information to assist in the selection of the most economical container that will provide the
required protection for any given application. This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard.
The information contained herein is intended for compliance.
C.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
C.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections C.3, C.4, and
C.5 of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list,
sections C.3, C.4, and C.5 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.
C.2.2 Government documents.
C.2.2.1 Specifications, standards and drawings. The following specifications, standards
and drawings form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise
specified, the issues of these documents are those listed in the issue of the Department of Defense
Index of Specifications and Standards (DoDISS) and supplement thereto, cited in the solicitation
(see 6.2).
SPECIFICATIONS
FEDERAL
A-A-160
A-A-881
A-A-1588
A-A-2714
A-A-2807
PPP-B-26
PPP-B-566
PPP-B-585
PPP-B-601
Sack, Shipping, Paper, Cushioned.

Bags, Shipping, Burlap.
Sack, Shipping, Paper (Cushioned with
Closed Cell Plastic Film).
Bag, Cloth, Mailing.
Box, File.
Bag, Plastic (General Purpose).
Boxes, Folding, Paperboard.
Boxes, Wood, Wirebound.
Boxes, Wood, Cleated-Plywood.
69
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
FEDERAL (continued)
PPP-B-621
PPP-B-676
PPP-B-1672
PPP-C-96
PPP-D-723
PPP-D-729
PPP-T-495
Boxes, Wood, Nailed and Lock-Corner.

Boxes, Setup.
Boxes, Shipping, Reusable With Cushioning.
Cans, Metal, 28 Gage and Lighter.
Drums, Fiber.
Drums, Shipping and Storage, Steel, 55Gallon (208 Liters).
Tubes, Mailing, and Filing
MILITARY
MIL-C-104
MIL-B-117
MIL-B-2427
MIL-C-3774
MIL-D-6054
MIL-D-6055
MIL-PRF-11264
MIL-B-22020
MIL-B-26195
MIL-B-46506
Crates, Wood: Lumber and Plywood

Sheathed, Nailed, and Bolted.
Box, Ammunition Packing, Wood, Nailed.
Crates, Wood; Open, 12,000- and 16,000Pound Capacity.
Drum, Metal-Shipping and Storage.
Drum, Metal Reusable, Shipping and
Storage (Cap. 88 to 510 cubic inches).
Container: Shipping, Reusable - for Tank
Automotive Engines, Transmissions,
Differentials, Transfers, Final Drives, Drive
Axles, and Similar Assemblies.
Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable,
Boxes, Wood-Cleated, Skidded, LoadBearing Base.
Boxes, Ammunition Packing, Wood,
Wirebound.
70
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
STANDARDS
FEDERAL
FED-STD-101
MIL-STD-648
MS24347
MS27683
MS27684
Design Guidelines for Specialized Shipping

Containers.
Drums, Metal, Reusable Shipping and
Storage.
Drums, Metal - Shipping and Storage 16 to
80 Gallons.
Drums, Metal Shipping and Storage 3 to 12
Gallons.
MILITARY
(Unless otherwise indicated, copies of these documents are available from the
19111-5094).
DRAWINGS
NAVICP DRAWINGS
P069
13414
15024
15450
Container, Molded, Reusable.

Container, Modular, Reusable.
Container, Shipping and Storage.
(These drawings may be obtained from NAVICP (Attn: 0712), 700 Robbins Avenue,
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098).
WARNER ROBINS AIR LOGISTIC CENTER DRAWINGS
11214-5002-100
11214-5002-200
11214-5002-300
11214-5002-400

71
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
(These drawings may be obtained from WR-ALC/TILAS, 420 Second St., Suite 100,
Robins AFB, GA 31098-1640).
C.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this
document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issue of the document
which is DoD adopted is that listed in the issue of the DoDISS cited in the solicitation.
ASTM-D1974
ASTM-D5118
ASTM-D5168
ASTM-D6039
ASTM-D6251
Methods of Closing, Sealing and Re-inforcing Fiberboard

Boxes (DoD adopted).
Fabrication and Closure of Triple Wall Corrugated
Fiberboard Containers (DoD adopted).
Crates, Wood, Open and Covered (DoD adopted).
Natural Wood-Cleated Panelboard Shipping Boxes (DoD
adopted).
Materials (ASTM), 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959).
C.3 GENERAL
C.3.1 Unit container size. Flexible and rigid containers shall be sized so that the wrapped
and cushioned item(s) being packaged fills at least 80 percent of the container volume.
Appropriate dunnage shall be used to fill voids. The sequence of length, width and depth for
ordering purposes shall be in accordance with the applicable container specification.
C.3.2 Use of unit containers as shipping containers. Unit containers may serve as
shipping containers only for the packing levels indicated in table C.II.
C.4 EXPENDABLE CONTAINERS
C.4.1 Interior containers. Table C.I lists specifications for various interior containers.
C.4.2 Exterior containers. Table C.II lists specifications for various exterior containers
with their weight limitations and the levels of protection for which their use is acceptable. Unit
containers that also serve as shipping containers must be selected from this table. When
72
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
containers fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118 are required, an appropriate standard size
shall be selected from table C.III. When one of these standard sizes cannot be used, the size of
the selected container must provide a snug fit for the wrapped and cushioned item.
C.5 REUSABLE CONTAINERS
C.5.1 Specialized containers.
C.5.1.1 Design. The design, development, test and evaluation of specialized shipping
containers for major equipment items and items which are subject to repair or Technical Order
Compliance (TOC) shall be in accordance with the requirements specified by the acquisition
activity.
C.5.1.2 Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS). When developing the packaging
requirements in accordance with 4.1 and when it has been determined that a specialized long life
container is required for an item, CDRS services shall be utilized in accordance with Appendix H
and as specified on the Contract Data Requirements List (see 6.3).
C.5.1.3 Specialized shipping containers for ordnance. General design criteria for the
design of reusable containers for ordnance and ordnance related items shall be in accordance with
MIL-STD-648. Container design and test requirements must be tailored based on the logistics
and engineering requirements of the item to be packaged.
C.5.2 Multiapplication containers.
C.5.2.1 Design and selection. Multiapplication containers employ shock reduction
systems that are able to protect a wide range of items to specified G-levels. Although these
containers are designed to protect repairable fragile items, features such as reusability, versatility,
and low labor costs of insertion and removal of the item make them cost effective for many less
fragile and non-repairable items. The DoD packaging activity (at the inventory control point),
contractor, subcontractor, or vendor shall select the appropriate multiapplication container for an
item based on the size, weight, and fragility parameters listed in table C.IV.
C.5.2.2 Identification. All multiapplication containers are assigned National Stock
Numbers (NSNs) as indicated in table C.IV.
73
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
C.5.2.3 Coded data. Appendix J provides codes to identify each type of multiapplication
container. This code, plus dimensions, completely specifies the type and size of container in
acquisition documents and DoD data systems.
C.5.2.4 Packaging design validation. The validation of packaging designs using
multiapplication containers shall be as follows:
a.
Packages for items which meet the weight, dimension, and fragility factors of table
C.IV do not require design validation.
b.
In cases where the fragility factor of an item is unknown, or is less than that listed in
table C.IV, packaging validation testing to verify the ability of the selected
multiapplication container to protect the item shall be conducted in accordance with
the provisions of Appendix F.
C.5.2.5 Short life containers. Container Types I thru IV listed in table C.IV are short life
multiapplication containers. These containers are briefly described as follows:
a.
Type I. Consists of a polyurethane foam cushion insert with a diecut, star shaped,
vertical cavity, and top and bottom pads of the same material assembled in the
container. Type I is used for packaging fragile items, either rectangular or cylindrical
in shape, such as meters, gauges, and air speed indicators. Items packaged in this star
pack type are inserted (loaded) into the cavity from the top of the container prior to
placing the top pad in place.
b.
Type II. Consists of a convoluted polyurethane foam cushion bonded to container

board. This assembly is subsequently folded up to become the slide of a modified
triple slide box. Although the cushioning provides protection against shock, it
essentially holds the item in place by pre-compression of the convoluted tips. Type II
is used for circuit boards and electronic modules. It is also used for packing glass
envelope electronic tubes or other items whose depth does not exceed the limits
shown in table C.IV.
c.
Type III. Consists of a telescoping container with bonded convoluted (some end and
side pads are flat sheet stock) polyurethane foam cushioning which forms an oblong
cavity. Type III is used to pack equipment such as receiver-transmitters, amplifiers,
power supply units, and electronic indicators.
74
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
d.
Type IV. Consists of a two piece (top and bottom) polyurethane foam insert, which
forms a star shaped cavity when the two pieces are mated in conjunction with end
pads of flat sheet stock. The insert components and end pads are bonded in place in a
half telescoping container fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118, Type CF,
Style DBLCC. The cushioning insert is similar to the Type I star pack insert except
that it is cut along (horizontal to) its greatest dimensional length to facilitate insertion
(loading) and extraction of relatively long, rectangular or cylindrical items such as
voltage regulators, electronic receivers, panels, transmitters, couplers and amplifiers.
When using these short life containers for items which do not completely fill the preformed
cushion cavity, the item shall be immobilized by adding additional compatible cushioning material.
Items whose dimensions slightly exceed the cushion cavity can be carefully pressed into position.
C.5.2.6 Long life containers. Container Types VI thru X listed in table C.IV are long life
multiapplication containers. These containers are briefly described as follows:
a.
Type VI. Consists of two halves of a polyethylene blow molded container with
polyurethane cushioning and an electrostatic protective cushioned bag. This is used
to ship circuit cards and similar type components.
b.
Type VII. Consists of a plastic type container with bonded convoluted polyurethane
foam cushioning which forms a cavity.
c.
Type VIII. Consists of a plastic type container with a coiled steel cable shock
mounted platform to which is strapped highly sensitive equipment.
d.
Type IX. Consists of two halves of a plastic container. A load platform suspended
by elastomeric shock mounts is in one half. Strap tie-downs are used to hold items in
place on the load platform. Type IX containers are made in four varieties and provide
15G shock protection for shock sensitive avionics-type equipment in the 10 to 91
pound weight range.
e.
Type X. Consists of two halves of a plastic container. A load platform suspended by

elastomeric shock mounts is in the bottom half. Strap tie-downs are used to hold
items in place on the load platform. Type X containers are made in seven sizes and
provide 45 G shock protection for shock sensitive electronics-type equipment in the
3-75 pound weight range.
75
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
C.5.2.7 Multiapplication container availability.
C.5.2.7.1 General Services Administration (GSA). Types I through IV and Type IX
multiapplication containers are stocked by GSA (Federal Supply Service). DoD and Federal
Agencies may obtain them from GSA. When authorized by the administrative contracting officer
and with concurrence of the GSA regional office affected, Government contractors may buy
direct from GSA. The Government may also elect to supply these packs to contractors as
government furnished property.
C.5.2.7.2 Naval Inventory Control Point (NAVICP). Types VI through VIII and X are
stocked by the NAVICP. DoD and Federal Agencies may obtain them from NAVICP,
Philadelphia, PA. The Government may also elect to supply these packs to contractors as
government furnished property.
C.5.2.7.3 Commercial sources. Suppliers of the multiapplication containers are located
nationwide. Names of these suppliers are available from the Contract Administration Activity.
76
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TABLE C.I. Interior containers.
Specification
Description
A-A-160
Sack, Shipping, Paper, Cushioned
A-A-881
Bags, Shipping, Burlap
A-A-1588
Sack, Shipping, Paper (Cushioned with Closed

Cell Plastic Film)
A-A-2714
Bag, Cloth, Mailing
A-A-2807
Box, File
PPP-B-26
Bag, Plastic, (General Purpose)
PPP-B-566
Boxes, Folding, Paperboard:

Variety 1, Process I or II
Variety 2, Process I
Variety 2, Process II
PPP-B-676
Boxes, Setup
PPP-C-96
Cans, Metal, 28 Gage and Lighter
PPP-T-495
Tubes, Mailing, and Filing
MIL-B-117
Bags, Sleeves and Tubing

(Interior Packaging)
MIL-B-22020
Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable, VCI

Treated
ASTM-D5118
Fiberboard Shipping Boxes:

Class weather resistant
Class domestic
77
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TABLE C.II. Exterior shipping containers - selection by maximum
weight of contents and level of packing.
Specification
PPP-B-585
PPP-B-601
PPP-B-621
PPP-B-1672
PPP-D-723
PPP-D-729
MIL-C-104
Description
Boxes, Wood, Wirebound
Class 2
Class 3
Boxes, Wood, CleatedPlywood
Domestic
Overseas
Boxes, Wood, Nailed and
Lock-corner
Overseas
Domestic
Box, Shipping, Reusable
with Cushioning
Drums, Fiber
Drums, Shipping and
Storage, Steel, 55-Gallon
Crates, Wood: Lumber
and Plywood Sheathed,
Nailed, and Bolted
MIL-B-2427
Box, Ammunition
Packing: Wood, Nailed
MIL-C-3774
Crates, Wood; Open

Type I
Type II
Weight of
Contents
(lbs., max)
Military
Packing
Level
400
300
B
A,B
1,000*
1,000
B
A,B
1,000
600
A,B
B
B
550
B
A,B
30,000
A,B
A,B
12,000
16,000
A,B
*Greater weights of contents may be permitted. Refer to PPP-B-601.
78
Remarks
Weight limitation of
specification shall
apply to style
selection.
May be modified by
inclusion of skids
See table C.IV, Type

I thru IV for weight
and size restrictions
Size limitation:
30'Lx9'Wx10'H
(unless otherwise
specified)
Top opening or end
opening with or
without handles
Bolted or nailed
assembly; size
limitations:
Type I-16'x8'x8'
Type II- 40'x8'x16'
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
weight of contents and level of packing Continued.
Specification
Description
MIL-D-6054
Drum, Metal-Shipping and

Storage
MIL-D-6055
Drum, Metal Reusable,

Shipping and Storage
(Cap. 88 to 510 cubic
inches)
Containers, Shipping,
Reusable
MIL-PRF11264
MIL-B26195
MIL-B46506
Boxes, Wood-Cleated,
Skidded, Load-Bearing
Base
Domestic
Overseas
NAVICP
Dwg. P069
Boxes, Ammunition
Packing, Wood,
Wirebound
Container, Molded,
Reusable
NAVICP
Dwg. 13414
NAVICP
Dwg. 15024
Weight of
Contents
(lbs., max)
Military
Packing
Level
A,B
A,B
A,B
2,500
2,500
B
A,B
A,B
A,B
Container, Modular,
Reusable
120
A,B
Container, Shipping and

Storage
40
A,B
79
Remarks
MS27683, MS27684;
exterior use; 3 to 80
gal. capacity
MS24347; exterior use
For vehicular
assemblies weighing
over 1600 pounds
Size limitation 16'L
Only plywood
superstructure shall be
used for Level A.
Top opening, with or
without handles
For circuit boards and
modules; See table
C.IV, Type VI
For major repairables;
See table C.IV, Type
VII
For gyroscopic
instruments; See table
C.IV, Type VIII
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
weight of contents and level of packing Continued.
Specification
Weight of
Contents
(lbs., max)
75
Military
Packing
Level
A,B

Storage
16.5
A,B

Storage
25
A,B

Storage
54
A,B

Storage
91
A,B
See
appropriate
table in
ASTMD5118
See
ASTMD5168
4,000
A,B
500
400
B
A
Description
NAVICP
Dwg.
15450
WRALC
Dwg. 112145002-100
WRALC
Dwg. 112145002-200
WRALC
Dwg. 112145002-300
WRALC
Dwg. 112145002-400
ASTMD5118

Storage
ASTMD5168
Boxes, Fiberboard,
Corrugated, Triple Wall,
Weather Resistant
Crates, Wood, Open and
Covered
ASTMD6039
ASTMD6251
Fiberboard Shipping
Boxes
Weather resistant
Wood-Cleated Panelboard
Boxes
Class 1, domestic
Class 2, overseas
80
Remarks
For depot level
repairables; see table
C.IV, Type X
For gyroscopic
instruments; See table
C.IV, Type IX
For gyroscopic
instruments; see table
C.IV, Type IX
For gyroscopic
C.IV, Type IX
For gyroscopic
C.IV, Type IX
See table C.III for
standard sizes
For size and weight

restrictions, see
ASTM-D6039
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TABLE C.III. Fiberboard container size list.
Container Inside
Dimensions
(inches)
National
Stock No.
4x4x12
4x4x16
5x5x20
6x4x8
6x6x6
6x6x10
6x6x15
6x6x18
6x6x24
8x4x4
8x8x8
8x8x10
8x8x12
8x8x14
8x8x16
8x8x24
9x6x6
9x6x18
9x9x9
10x6x4
10x6x10
10x8x6
10x10x8
10x10x10
10x10x12
11x11x11
11.25x8.75x4
11-1/4x8-3/4x18
12x6x6
12x6x12
12x6x15
12x9x6
12x12x4
12x12x8
12x12x10
12x12x12
12x12x14
13x13x13
14x10x6
14x10x10
14x12x8
14x14x12
14x14x14
14x14x16
14x14x18
15x15x10
16x10x10
16x12x8
16x12x12
16x16x12
16x16x16
18x12x12
18x15x10
8115-00-418-4660
8115-00-200-6954
8115-01-030-3532
8115-00-190-4888
8115-00-183-9503
8115-00-417-9440
8115-01-166-6458
8115-00-190-4920
8115-00-190-4921
8115-00-183-9500
8115-00-183-9498
8115-00-183-9499
8115-00-281-3882
8115-01-166-6459
8115-00-190-4936
8115-00-417-9442
8115-00-190-4950
8115-01-029-6777
8115-01-166-6460
8115-00-183-9496
8115-00-255-1341
8115-00-183-9497
8115-00-183-9494
8115-00-190-4959
8115-01-034-0370
8115-00-417-9406
8115-01-012-5003
8115-00-190-4969
8115-00-183-9492
8115-00-190-4974
8115-00-417-9380
8115-01-011-3626
8115-00-190-4860
8115-00-417-9378
8115-00-183-9490
8115-00-183-9491
8115-00-409-3807
8115-01-166-6461
8115-00-495-5458
8115-01-030-3537
8115-00-183-9488
8115-00-183-9489
8115-00-417-9321
8115-00-585-4906
8115-00-417-9320
8115-00-417-9318
8115-01-030-4249
8115-00-183-9487
8115-00-418-4653
8115-00-451-7853
8115-00-190-5002
8115-00-514-2409
8115-00-190-5007
Container
Wt. (lbs.)
.74
.72
.88
.45
.52
.68
.88
1.00
1.25
.38
.90
1.02
1.12
1.25
1.35
1.80
.66
1.50
1.15
.60
.85
.90
1.26
1.40
1.50
1.70
.93
1.86
.78
1.15
1.32
1.10
1.35
1.50
1.81
1.97
2.14
2.48
1.35
1.68
1.80
2.22
2.68
2.75
3.00
2.55
1.80
1.93
2.28
3.09
3.50
2.50
2.81
Container Outside Dimensions

(inches)
4.3x4.3x12.5
4.3x4.3x16.5
5.3x5.3x20.5
6.3x4.3x8.5
6.3x6.3x6.5
6.3x6.3x10.5
6.3x6.3x15.5
6.3x6.3x18.5
6.3x6.3x24.5
8.3x4.3x4.5
8.3x8.3x8.5
8.3x8.3x10.5
8.3x8.3x12.5
8.3x8.3x14.5
8.3x8.3x16.5
8.3x8.3x24.5
9.3x6.3x6.5
9.3x6.3x18.5
9.3x9.3x9.5
10.5x6.3x4.5
10.3x6.3x10.5
10.5x8.3x6.5
10.5x10.5x8.5
10.5x10.5x10.5
10.5x10.5x12.5
11.5x11.5x11.5
11.5x9.0x6.5
11.5x9.0x18.5
12.5x6.3x6.5
12.5x6.3x12.5
12.5x6.3x15.5
12.3x9.3x6.5
12.5x12.5x4.5
12.5x12.5x8.5
12.5x12.5x10.5
12.5x12.5x12.5
12.5x12.5x14.5
13.3x13.3x13.5
14.5x10.5x6.5
14.5x10.5x10.5
14.5x12.5x8.5
14.5x14.5x12.5
14.5x14.5x14.5
14.5x14.5x16.5
14.5x14.5x18.5
15.5x15.5x10.5
16.5x10.5x10.5
16.5x12.5x8.5
16.5x12.5x12.5
16.5x16.5x12.5
16.5x16.5x16.5
18.5x12.5x12.5
18.5x15.5x10.5
81
Container
Cube
(cu . ft.)
Type
Grade
Class
Style
Variety
Bursting
Strength
2
(lbs/in. )
.134
.177
.333
.135
.149
.241
.356
.425
.563
.093
.339
.419
.498
.578
.658
.977
.220
.627
.476
.172
.394
.328
.542
.670
.798
.880
.270
1.108
.296
.570
.706
.430
.407
.769
.949
1.130
1.311
1.382
.573
.925
.892
1.521
1.764
2.008
2.251
1.460
1.053
1.015
1.492
1.969
2.600
1.673
1.742
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
V3c
V3c
W5c
W6c
W6c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
W6c
W5c
W5c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
W5c
W5c
V3c
W5c
V3c
W5c
W5c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
W5c
V3c
V3c
W6c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
W5c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
400
400
275
175
175
400
400
400
400
175
275
275
400
400
400
400
275
275
400
275
400
275
275
400
400
400
400
400
400
275
400
400
175
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
275
400
400
400
400
400
400
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TABLE C.III. Fiberboard container size list Continued.
Container Inside
Dimensions
(inches)
18x15x15
18x18x12
18x18x18
20x10x10
20x12x12
20x16x16
20x20x12
20x20x20
22x22x12
24x12x12
24x14x14
24x16x12
24x16x16
24x18x18
24x20x16
24x24x10
24x24x12
24x24x16
24x24x20
24x24x24
26x12x8
26x12x10
26x18x18
26x26x20
29x14x14
30x12x6
30x12x12
30x16x16
30x20x12
34x14x10
34x20x15
34x20x20
36x12x12
36x14x14
36x24x22
36x26x18
40x14x14
National
Stock No.
8115-00-417-9292
8115-00-183-9482
8115-00-428-4185
8115-01-166-6462
8115-01-008-3645
8115-00-275-5777
8115-00-428-4183
8115-00-428-4158
8115-00-428-4145
8115-01-166-6464
8115-01-071-2972
8115-00-183-9481
8115-00-292-0123
8115-01-163-9189
8115-00-417-9236
8115-00-428-4124
8115-00-174-2354
8115-01-119-2523
8115-01-166-6451
8115-00-417-9416
8115-01-166-6450
8115-01-166-6449
8115-01-166-6454
8115-01-166-6463
8115-01-166-6447
8115-00-190-5017
8115-01-166-6448
8115-00-292-0120
8115-01-163-3446
8115-00-564-8053
8115-01-166-6455
8115-01-166-6456
8115-01-166-6457
8115-00-190-5020
8115-01-166-5118
8115-01-166-6453
8115-01-166-6452
Container
Wt. (lbs.)
3.34
3.64
4.38
2.05
2.60
3.90
4.30
5.35
5.00
2.90
3.60
3.80
4.32
5.00
5.30
5.45
5.75
6.05
6.70
7.62
3.00
3.30
5.50
7.00
4.00
2.61
3.50
5.00
4.80
3.75
6.00
6.50
3.82
4.70
7.20
6.80
6.00
Container Outside Dimensions

(inches)
18x5x15.5x15.5
18x5x18.5x12.5
18.5x18.5x18.5
20.5x10.5x10.5
20.3x12.3x12.5
20.5x16.5x16.5
20.5x20.5x12.5
20.5x20.5x20.5
22.5x22.5x12.5
24.5x12.5x12.5
24.5x14.5x14.5
24.5x16.5x12.5
24.5x16.5x16.5
24.5x18.5x18.5
24.5x20.5x16.5
24.5x24.5x10.5
24.5x24.5x12.5
24.5x24.5x16.5
24.5x24.5x20.5
24.5x24.5x24.5
26.5x12.5x8.5
26.5x12.5x10.5
26.5x18.5x18.5
26.5x26.5x20.5
29.5x14.5x14.5
30.5x12.5x6.5
30.5x12.5x12.5
30.5x16.5x16.5
30.5x20.5x12.5
34.5x14.5x10.5
34.5x20.5x16.0
34.5x20.5x20.5
36.5x12.5x12.5
36.5x14.5x14.5
36.5x24.5x22.5
36.5x26.5x18.5
40.5x14.5x14.5
82
Container
Cube
(cu . ft.)
2.572
2.476
3.664
1.308
1.806
3.230
3.040
4.986
3.662
2.215
2.916
2.924
3.860
4.853
4.796
3.647
4.342
5.732
7.121
8.510
1.629
2.013
5.249
8.331
3.589
1.434
2.758
4.805
4.523
3.040
6.549
8.390
3.300
4.441
11.644
10.355
4.928
Type
Grade
Class
Style
Variety
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
CF
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
W6c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
V3c
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
WR
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
RSC
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
SW
Bursting
Strength
2
(lbs/in. )
400
400
400
400
400
175
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TABLE C.IV. Multiapplication container selection.
TYPE I
PPP-B-1672, Vertical Star (Table J.VII, Code NR)
Container ID (inches)
(National Stock Number)
Recommended max. bare

item dimensions (in.)
6 x 6 x 10
(8115-00-192-1603)
3 Dia x 6
8 x 8 x 12
(8115-00-192-1604)
3x3x6
3x3x8
4 Dia x 8
4x4x8
10 x 10 x 12
(8115-00-192-1605)
12 x 12 x 14
(8115-00-134-3655)
5 Dia x 8
4 Dia x 6
5 Dia x 6
6 Dia x 6
5x5x6
5 Dia x 8
6 Dia x 8
5x5x8
6x6x8
12 x 12 x 18
(8115-00-050-5237)
5 Dia x 10
6 Dia x 10
5 x 5 x 10
6 x 6 x 10
14 x 14 x 16
(8115-00-134-3656)
6 Dia x 10
7 Dia x 10
6 x 6 x 10
7 x 7 x 10
Item weight
range
(lbs.)
1.0 - 1.5
1.6 - 2.2
2.3 - 3.0
1.5 - 4.0
1.5 - 4.0
3.0 - 7.5
7.6 - 8.5
3.0 - 5.0
5.1 - 7.0
3.5 - 5.5
2.0 - 3.0
3.1 - 4.5
4.6 - 5.0
3.0 - 6.0
4.5 - 7.0
4.0 - 9.0
3.5 - 4.5
4.6 - 8.5
5.0 - 7.0
7.1 13.0
3.0 - 5.0
5.1 - 7.0
7.1 11.0
5.0 - 7.0
7.1 10.0
10.1 12.0
4.0 - 5.0
5.1 11.0
6.0 - 8.0
8.1 16.0
4.0 - 6.0
6.1 - 8.0
8.1 13.0
8.0 10.0
10.1 14.0
14.1 20.0
6.0 15.0
8.0 14.0
14.1 17.0
17.1 20.0
5.0 - 7.0
7.1 - 9.0
9.1 12.0
6.5 - 9.0
9.1 - 12.0
12.1 - 21.0
21.1 - 23.0
*Maximum Shock (Gs)

transmitted to item
30 - 40
25 - 29
30 - 40
30 - 40
30 - 40
25 - 29
30 - 40
25 - 29
30 - 40
30 - 40
30 - 40
25 - 29
30 - 40
30 - 40
30 - 40
30 - 40
25 - 29
20 - 24
25 - 29
20 - 24
30 - 40
25 - 29
20 - 24
30 - 40
25 - 29
20 - 24
25 - 29
20 - 24
25 - 29
20 - 24
30 - 40
25 - 29
20 - 24
30 - 40
25 - 29
20 - 24
25 - 29
20 - 24
24 - 29
30 - 40
30 - 40
24 - 29
20 - 24
30 - 40
25 - 29
20 - 24
25 - 29
Packaged outside
dimensions
(inches)
6.3 x 6.3 x 10.5
Packaged
Cube
(cu. ft.)
.242
8.3 x 8.3 x 12.5
.499
10.5 x 10.5 x 12.5
.798
12.5 x 12.5 x 14.5
1.312
12.5 x 12.5 x 18.5
1.673
14.5 x 14.5 x 16.5
2.008
* Shock values in this table were determined by instrumented free fall drop testing in accordance with Method
5007 of FED-STD-101.
83
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TABLE C.IV. Multiapplication container selection - Continued.
TYPE II
PPP-B-1672, folding convoluted (Table J.VII, Code NS)
Recommended max. bare

item dimensions (in.)
Typical item
weight (lbs.)
6 x 5 x 2-1/2
(8115-00-787-2142)
5 x 4-1/2 x 1-1/4
0.5
Packaged Outside Dimensions

(inches)
6.3 x 5.3 x 3.0
Packaged
Cube
(cu. ft.)
.058
6 x 5 x 3-1/2
(8115-00-787-2147)
5 x 4-1/2 x 2-1/4
1.0
6.3 x 5.3 x 4.0
.078
9 x 6 x 2-1/2
(8115-00-101-7647)
8 x 5-1/2 x 1-1/4
0.9
9.3 x 6.3 x 3.0
.102
9 x 6 x 3-1/2
(8115-00-101-7638)
8 x 5-1/2 x 2-1/4
1.8
9.3 x 6.3 x 4.0
.136
10 x 10 x 3-1/2
(8115-01-057-1244)
9 x 9-1/2 x 2-1/4
1.8
10.5 x 10.5 x 4.0
.256
12 x 8 x 2-1/2
(8115-00-787-2146)
11 x 7-1/2 x 1-1/4
1.8
12.5 x 8.3 x 3.0
.181
12 x 8 x 3-1/2
(8115-00-787-2148)
11 x 7-1/2 x 2-1/4
3.6
12.5 x 8.3 x 4.0
.241
13 x 13 x 3-1/2
(8115-01-057-1243)
12 x 12-1/2 x 2-1/4
4.3
13.5 x 13.5 x 4.0
.422
16 x 16 x 3-1/2
(8115-01-057-1245)
15 x 15-1/2 x 2-1/4
8.6
16.5 x 16.5 x 4.0
.631
18 x 12 x 2-1/2
(8115-01-019-4085)
17 x 11-1/2 x 1-1/4
4.3
18.5 x 12.5 x 3.0
.402
18 x 12 x 3-1/2
(8115-01-019-4084)
17 x 11-1/2 x 2-1/4
8.6
18.5 x 12.5 x 4.0
.536
24 x 16 x 3-1/2
(8115-01-093-3730)
23 x 15 x 2-1/4
10.0
24.5 x 16.5 x 4.0
.936
NOTE: Because items assigned to these packs are not of extremely low fragility, dynamic cushioning values
have not been determined.
84
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TYPE III
PPP-B-1672, telescoping encapsulated (Table J.VII, Code NV)
Item
Maximum Shock
Recommended
weight
(Gs)
(National Stock
max. bare item
range
transmitted to
Number)
dimensions (in.)
(lbs.)
item
30 x 16 x 14
24 x 11 x 9
28 - 48
30 - 39
(8115-00-516-0242)
49 - 54
40 - 50
Packaged outside
dimensions
(inches)
Packaged
Cube
(cu. ft.)
31.0 x 17.0 x 14.5
4.423
32 x 12 x 14
(8115-00-519-1825)
26 x 6 x 8
12 - 19
20 - 29
30 - 33
30 - 39
25 - 29
40 - 50
33.0 x 13.0 x 14.5
3.600
26 x 9 x 9
(8115-01-015-1313)
20 x 5 x 5
20 (max.)
50 (max.)
27.0 x 10.0 x 9.3
1.454
24 x 14 x 14
(8115-00-550-3558)
18 x 8 x 8
13 - 16
17 - 38
30 - 39
25 - 29
25.0 x 15.0 x 14.5
3.147
20 x 14 x 9
(8115-00-516-0251)
16 x 10 x 5
6-7
7-8
30 - 39
40 - 50
21.0 x 15.0 x 9.5
1.732
25 x 14 x 14
(8115-00-550-3574)
13 x 7 x 7
7 - 14
15 - 16
17 - 19
20 - 24
30 - 39
40 - 50
26.0 x 15.0 x 14.5
3.273
32 x 18 x 16
(8115-01-015-1315)
24 x 13 x 11
80 (max.)
20 - 24
32.5 x 18.5 x 17.0
5.916
34 x 24 x 18
(8115-01-015-1314)
25 x 18 x 12
90 (max.)
35 (max.)
36.5 x 26.5 x 19.0
10.636
24 x 18 x 16
(8115-01-015-1312)
18 x 13 x 11
20 - 39
40 - 50
25 - 29
30 - 39
25.0 x 19.0 x 16.5
4.536
30 x 27 x 14
(8115-01-094-6520)
24 x 21 x 8
26 - 45
46 - 50
21 - 28
23 - 30
31.0 x 28.0 x 15.0
7.535
85
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TYPE IV
PPP-B-1672, horizontal star (Table J.VII, Code NW)
Container ID
Item
Recommended
(inches)
weight
max. bare item
(National Stock
range
dimensions (In.)
Number)
(lbs.)
20 x 14 x 14
14 x 5-1/8 x 5-3/8
6 - 14
(8115-00-010-8956)
15 - 18
19 - 21
22 x 16 x 16
(8115-01-006-7257)
Maximum Shock
(Gs)
transmitted to
item
25 - 29
30 - 39
40 - 50
14 x 7 x 7
10 - 14
15 - 19
20 - 23
24 - 26
27 - 29
30 - 39
20 - 24
25 - 29
30 - 39
40 - 50
16 x 6-3/8 x 6-3/8
8 - 20
21 - 27
28 - 31
25 - 29
30 - 39
40 - 50
16 x 7-1/4 x 7-1/4
11 - 16
17 - 21
22 - 24
25 - 27
28 - 31
25 - 29
20 - 24
25 - 29
30 - 39
40 - 50
86
Packaged outside
dimensions
(inches)
Packaged
Cube
(cu. ft.)
20.5 x 14.5 x 14.5
2.495
22.5 x 16.5 x 16.5
3.545
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TYPE VI
Molded Reusable Container Assy for Circuit Cards and Modules
NAVICP Drawing No. P069 (Table J.VII, Code NY)
Item
Maximum Shock
*Recommended
weight
(Gs)
(National Stock
max. load size
range
transmitted
to
Number)
(in.)
(lbs.)
item
11.25 x 8.25 x 2.125
8.5 x 6.0 x 1.0
0-3
NOTE: Because
(8145-00-260-9556)
items assigned to
these packs are
8.5 x 6.0 x 3.25
0-3
not of extremely
11.25 x 8.75 x 4.5
low fragility,
(8145-00-260-9548)
dynamic
13.25 x 10.75 x 2.125 10.5 x 8.0 x 1.00
0-4
cushioning values
(8145-00-260-9559)
have not been
determined.
13.25 x 10.75 x 4.5
10.5 x 8.0 x 3.25
0-4
(8145-00-260-9562)
Packaged outside
dimensions
(inches)
Packaged
Cube
(cu. ft.)
12.0 x 10.0 x 3.0
0.208
12.0 x 10.0 x 5.0
0.347
14.0 x 12.0 x 3.0
0.292
14.0 x 12.0 x 5.0
0.486
6.75 x 5.0 x 2.0

(8145-01-014-0440)
5.0 x 3.0 x 1.0
0-2
8.0 x 6.0 x 3.0
0.083
19.75 x 13.75 x 4.5

(8145-01-012-4088)
17.0 x 11.0 x 2.62
0-4
21.0 x 15.0 x 5.0
0.911
24.0 x 12.0 x 6.0

(8145-01-164-4073)
24.0 x 11.0 x 3.0
0-4
27.0 x 14.5 x 7.0
1.586
* Includes wrap, barrier, bag, cushioned pouch and other packaging materials as required.
87
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TYPE VII
Modular Reusable Containers for Packaging Major Repairables
NAVICP Drawing No. 13414 (Table J.VII, Code NZ)
Maximum
Container ID (inches) *Recommended Max. item
Shock (Gs)
(National Stock
max. load size
weight
transmitted
Number)
(in.)
(lbs)
to item
10 x 10 x 14
4x4x8
6.0
40 - 50
(8145-00-301-2987)
Packaged outside
dimensions
(inches)
Packaged
Cube
(cu. ft.)
13.0 x 13.0 x 16.0
1.565
10 x 10 x 18
(8145-00-288-1396)
4 x 4 x 12
7.0
40 - 50
13.0 x 13.0 x 20.0
1.956
14.5 x 13 x 10
(8145-00-553-1539)
8.5 x 7 x 4
9.0
40 - 50
18.0 x 16.0 x 12.0
2.000
14 x 14 x 12
(8145-00-519-6384)
8x8x6
11.0
40 - 50
17.0 x 17.0 x 14.0
2.341
12 x 12 x 18
(8145-00-288-1397)
6 x 6 x 12
11.0
40 - 50
15.0 x 15.0 x 20.0
2.604
20 x 13 x 12
(8145-00-485-8256)
14 x 7 x 6
17.0
40 - 50
23.0 x 16.0 x 14.0
2.981
16 x 16 x 15
(8145-00-522-6907)
10 x 10 x 9
20.0
40 - 50
19.0 x 19.0 x 17.0
3.552
18 x 14.5 x 19
(8145-00-449-8424)
12 x 8.5 x 13
25.0
40 - 50
21.0 x 18.0 x 21.0
4.594
22.5 x 21 x 11.5
(8145-01-044-3289)
16.5 x 15 x 5.5
33.0
40 - 50
26.0 x 24.0 x 14.0
5.056
22 x 16 x 17
(8145-00-540-1762)
16 x 10 x 11
31.3
40 - 50
25.0 x 19.0 x 19.0
5.223
29 x 14.5 x 14
(8145-00-501-9138)
23 x 8.5 x 8
28.0
40 - 50
32.0 x 18.0 x 16.0
5.333
28 x 18 x 13
(8145-00-549-6647)
22 x 12 x 7
35.0
40 - 50
31.0 x 21.0 x 15.0
5.651
34 x 18 x 15
(8145-00-536-4925)
28 x 12 x 9
44
40 - 50
37.0 x 21.0 x 17.0
7.644
30 x 18 x 19
(8145-00-449-8427)
24 x 12 x 13
50
40 - 50
33.0 x 21.0 x 21.0
8.422
22.5 x 21 x 22.5
(8145-00-499-9808)
16.5 x 15 x 16.5
55
40 - 50
26.0 x 24.0 x 25.0
9.028
88
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TYPE VII - Continued
Modular Reusable Containers for Packaging Major Repairables
NAVICP Drawing No. 13414 (Table J.VII, Code NZ)
Max.
Maximum
Container ID (inches) *Recommended
item
Shock
(Gs)
(National Stock
max. load size
weight
transmitted
Number)
(in.)
(lbs)
to item
27 x 27 x 17
21 x 21 x 11
70
40 - 50
(8145-00-485-8250)
Packaged outside
dimensions
(inches)
Packaged
Cube
(cu. ft.)
30.0 x 30.0 x 19.0
9.896
34 x 24 x 17
(8145-00-514-2798)
28 x 18 x 11
78
40 - 50
37.0 x 27.0 x 19.0
10.984
28 x 24.5 x 20.5
(8145-01-026-2369)
22 x 18.5 x 14.5
80
40 - 50
31.0 x 28.0 x 23.0
11.553
40 x 24 x 18
(8145-00-529-8585)
34 x 18 x 12
85
40 - 50
43.0 x 27.0 x 20.0
13.438
36 x 20 x 27
(8145-01-008-3683)
30 x 14 x 21
120
40 - 50
39.0 x 23.0 x 29.0
15.054
27 x 27 x 32
(8145-01-010-3776)
21 x 21 x 26
110
40 - 50
30.0 x 30.0 x 34.0
17.708
* Includes interior carton and associated blocking and bracing when applicable.
89
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TYPE VIII
Shipping & Storage Containers for Gyroscopic Instruments
NAVICP Drawing No. 15024 (Table J.VII, Code MY)
Container ID
(inches)
(National Stock
Number)
*Max. load
size without
handling case
(in.)
30 x 26.38 x 25.5
(8145-01-0163451)
13 x 9 x 8
35 x 27 x 30
(8145-01-0163452)
17.5 x 12.25 x
13
Handling Case,
outside
dimensions
(National Stock
No.)
Item size using

handling case
10.38 x 6.5 x 6.5

(8145-01-0163453)
Max Length - 8.38

Max Width - 4.5
Depth Min - 1.69
Max - 3.75
12.5 x 7.25 x 8
(8145-01-0163454)
Max Length - 10.5

Max Width - 5.25
Depth Min - 3.25
Max - 5.25
14 x 10.38 x 9.75
(8145-01-0163455)
Max Length - 12
Max Width - 8.38
Depth Min - 5
Max - 7
18 x 12.25 x
11.75
(8145-01-0163456)
Max Length - 16
Max Width - 10.25
Depth Min - 6.9
Max - 9
19 x 14 x 14.25
(8145-01-0163445)
Max Length
Max Width
Depth Min
Max
0.5 - 10.5
Max
shock
(Gs)
transmitted to
item
15
8 - 40
15
Item
Weight
Range
(lbs.)
- 17
- 12
- 9.5
- 11.5
* Includes wrap and cushioning as required to protect the barrier bag when applicable.
90
Packaged
outside
dimensions
(inches)
Packaged
cube
(cu. ft)
30.4 x 26.8 x
25.6
12.070
35.4 x 29.0 x
30.4
18.061
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TYPE IX
Type IX. Shipping and Storage Containers for Avionics Instruments
and Shock Sensitive Items; Warner Robins Air Logistics Center
Drawing Nos. 11214-5002-100, 11214-5002-200, 11214-5002-300,
11214-5002-400 (Table J.VII, Code WY)
Item
Maximum
Weight
Shock (Gs)
Item Size Max/Min (inches)
Range
transmitted
(lbs.)
to item
24.5 x 23.25 x 21.75
10.5 x 9.75 x 9.25/4 x 4 x 5
10 - 16.5
15
(8145-01-235-1113)
Packaged outside
dimensions
(inches)
Packaged
Cube
(cu. ft.)
27.5 x 26 x 25
10.344
32.5 x 32.25 x 27
(8145-01-235-1112)
21 x 21 x 15.75/8 x 6 x 5
12 - 25
15
35.25 x 35.25 x 30.25
21.752
32.5 x 32.25 x 27
(8145-01-236-5003)
21 x 21 x 15.75/12 x 6 x 6.75
25 - 54
15
35.25 x 35.25 x 30.25
21.752
38.5 x 44 x 36
(8145-01-235-1114)
25 x 32 x 20.8/15 x 8.75 x 7.75
40 - 91
15
41.13 x 37 x 39.13
34.461
91
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX C
TYPE X
Type X,
Modular Reusable Containers for Packaging Depot Level Repairables;

NAVICP Drawing No. 15450 (Table J.VII, Code RC)
Item
Packaged
Packaged
Item
Size
Weight
Outside
Container NSN
Cube
(in.)
Range
Dimensions
(cu.
ft.)
(lbs.)
(in.)
8145-01-262-2982
Min. 8 x 4 x 4
3 - 10
19.0 x 15.0 x 12.0 1.979
Max. 12 x 8 x 8
8145-01-262-2983
Min. 12 x 8 x 6
Max. 14 x 12 x 9
10 - 20
21.0 x 19.0 x 15.0
3.464
8145-01-262-2984
Min. 14 x 12 x 7
Max. 16.5 x 15 x 10
15 - 30
23.5 x 22.0 x 16.0
4.787
8145-01-262-2985
Min. 14 x 12 x 9
Max. 28 x 13 x 12
20 - 40
35.0 x 20.0 x 18.0
7.292
8145-01-262-2986
Min. 14 x 14 x 10
Max. 16.5 x 16.5 x 15
30 - 60
23.5 x 23.5 x 21.0
6.711
8145-01-262-2987
Min. 14 x 14 x 10
Max. 28 x 21 x 14.5
30 - 60
35.0 x 28.0 x 20.5
11.626
8145-01-262-2988
Min. 25 x 14 x 10
Max. 34 x 21 x 14
45 - 75
41.0 x 28.0 x 20.0
13.287
92
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX D
FOR KITS (PARTS AND MODIFICATION)
D.1 SCOPE. This appendix covers the development of military packaging for parts kits and
modification kits (see 4.7). This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard. The information
contained herein is intended for compliance, as applicable.
D.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.
D.3 PRESERVATION. Military preservation shall be applied to all items within the kits,
including Government furnished property (GFP) or spare parts (to be assembled into kits).
Methods of preservation shall be determined in accordance with Appendix A and procedures
contained herein.
D.3.1 Consolidation of different items within a method of preservation. Hazardous items
will be packaged in the same container only if the commodities are compatible. Items of different
physical characteristics may be consolidated within the same method of preservation if all of the
following requirements are met:
a.
The items to be consolidated are all part of the same individual kit, identified by a
single NSN.
b.
The method of preservation shall afford adequate protection to the most critical item
contained therein.
c.
The area of the protective barrier shall not be increased by the addition of noncritical
items to the extent that the package life will be shortened due to the increase in water
vapor transmission or that a substantial increase in desiccant will be required.
d.
Items of a delicate nature shall not be subjected to damage from rugged items
contained within the same package.
e.
Noncritical items of odd shapes or having sharp protrusions will not damage
protective barriers.
f.
Items of dissimilar metals subject to damage from electrolytic action shall be insulated
with suitable material to prevent forming of galvanic cells.
93
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX D
g.
Electromagnetic and electrostatic sensitive items shall be provided protection from

degradation with electrostatic or electromagnetic protective materials conforming to
military specifications.
D.3.2 Application of preservative compounds or oils.

D.3.2.1 Kits procured for oxygen equipment. No preservative compound or oil shall be
applied to any item that may come into contact with oxygen.
D.3.2.2 Preservation procedures. All items are to be thoroughly cleaned and dried in
accordance with 5.2.1 before application of preservative compounds or oils. In no instance shall a
preservative compound or oil be applied over an operational grease or oil.
D.3.2.3 Items susceptible to corrosion (iron, steel, magnesium, etc.). No preservative
compound or oil will be applied if application would be harmful to the item. Preservative
compounds are preferred; however, preservative oils may be used when compounds are difficult
to remove, or are not feasible due to size, configuration or application of the item.
D.4 UNIT PRESERVATION
D.4.1 Physical protection. When kit items require physical protection, cushioning, wraps
and containers of the minimum size and weight necessary to afford such protection shall be
applied.
D.4.2 Segregation of items within packs. Care will be used to ensure that items which
would be difficult to identify by visual observation are kept segregated and individually identified.
Also, it is desirable to segregate components of two related repairable assemblies within the kit.
For example, in a kit for an air-to-air missile, components for the arming and fusing subsystem
shall not be intermingled with components for the guidance subsystem. Segregation of items
within a kit shall be accomplished by wraps, bags, boxes, dividers, container separations, tubes,
skin or blister packs or other approved means.
D.4.3 Skin packaging. When skin packaging is used for kits, provisions shall be
incorporated into the design layout for minimizing the size of the skin pack. This may be
accomplished by folding, slotting, scoring, creasing, or perforating the substrate.
D.4.3.1 Skin packaging metals. Segregated metal items coated with preservative shall be
wrapped with a greaseproof material unless the skin packaging material, ink, and backing board in
contact with the item are noncorrosive and greaseproof. Bare metal items not coated with a
94
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX D
preservative compound shall be wrapped with a neutral material unless the skin packaging
material, ink, and backing board in contact with the item are noncorrosive.
D.4.3.2 Skin packaging shims or gaskets. Kit items such as thin shims or paper gaskets,
that cannot be removed from the skin pack without damage to the item shall be placed in a bag or
other suitable protective media prior to film application to provide ease of removal.
D.5 PACKING AND MARKING OF KITS. Packing and marking requirements shall be in
accordance with 5.3 and 5.5, respectively.
95
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
MILITARY PACKAGING DATA FORMS
E.1 SCOPE. This appendix outlines procedures and provides necessary guidance and
instructions for the preparation of required military packaging data. This appendix is a mandatory
part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance.
E.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
E.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections E.4, E.5 and
E.6 of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list,
sections E.4, E.5 and E.6 of this appendix whether or not they are listed.
E.2.2 Government documents.
E.2.2.1 Standards. The following standards form a part of this document to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those listed in the
issue of the Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards (DoDISS) and
supplement thereto, cited in the solicitation (see 6.2).
STANDARDS
MILITARY
MIL-STD-100
MIL-STD-129
MIL-STD-961
Engineering Drawing Practices.

DoD Standard Practice for Defense
Specifications.
(Unless otherwise indicated, copies of these standards are available from the
1911-5094.)
E.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
E.3.1 Development of military packaging data. Data submitted by contractors shall be
prepared in accordance with the requirements of this standard. Each element of the code shall be
completed, indicating the type, kind of material, or processes used. These data and codes shall be
supplemented as outlined herein.
96
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
E.3.2 Recording military packaging data.
E.3.2.1 Manual recording of data. Unless otherwise specified by the procuring activity,
figure E.1 (DD Form 2326) "Preservation and Packing Data," is the form on which initial entry or
revision to previously established and approved elements of military packaging data shall be
annotated. Data shall be recorded in coded form or in the clear as required, or by reference to
specification(s) or Special Packaging Instructions (SPIs). Entries shall be recorded to assure
clear, legible reproduction of the data. The contractor may, upon approval of the contracting
agency, furnish the data on forms he uses for his internal operation, or via electronic media,
provided there is no change in the sequence and format of figure E.1.
E.3.2.2 National Stock Number (NSN) requirements. When preservation and packing
data are submitted on DD Form 2326, NSNs shall be provided in Part A of figure E.1 only.
E.3.2.3 Coded data. Coded data shall be as specified in E.4. If additional codes are
needed to specify a requirement, requests for inclusion, with substantiating data, shall be initiated
in accordance with the directions contained in Appendix J. Until the new requirement is
represented by a code symbol in Appendix J, Code Z or ZZ shall be used and details shown as
supplemental data.
E.3.2.4 Kits (Parts and Modification). Unless otherwise specified, packaging
requirements for modification and parts kits will be defined on special packaging instructions
(SPIs).
E.3.2.5 Special packaging instructions. SPIs shall be prepared in accordance with E.5.
E.4 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
E.4.1 Development of military packaging data. Packaging data is divided into the
following categories:
Item identification data (figure E.1, Part A)
Preservation and packing data (figure E.1, Part B)
Supplemental data (figure E.1, Part C)
Special packaging instruction data (figure E.1, Part D)
When data is requested it shall be developed as specified in E.4.2.4, E.4.2.5, E.4.2.6, and E.4.2.7.
Item identification data shall be developed for all items. Unless otherwise specified, no further
data need be developed for common group items. Preservation and packing data, supplemental
97
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
data, and special packaging instruction data shall be developed for selective and special group
items as required. Data elements 29 thru 49 and 79 of table E.II shall not be provided for special
group items, unless otherwise directed by the requiring activity.
E.4.1.1 Procedural specification data. When the packaging of an item can be defined by
use of procedural specifications, data elements of table E.II, table E.IV, and table E.I, columns
39-42 need not be developed. The appropriate procedural packaging specification shall be
invoked by direct reference as supplemental data (see table E.III, columns 22-80).
E.4.2 Preparation of military packaging data. The detailed guidance in tables E.I through
E.IV prescribes the procedures for inserting data on DD Form 2326. This is a manual multiple
use form designed to reduce the amount of work necessary in compiling data relative to
packaging of any given item. The form has provisions for:
Nomenclature
Manufacturer's Commercial and Government Entity code (CAGE) and
design activity's part number
Approval stamp (E.6.1.5)
Configuration item specification number
Item identification data
Preservation and packing data
Supplemental data
Special packaging instruction data
In the detailed guidance below, column numbers refer to the digit position indicators preprinted
on figure E.1.
E.4.2.1 Nomenclature. Show item name in the designated block on the figure E.1 format.
E.4.2.2 Manufacturer's Commercial and Government Entity code and part number. Show
the Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) code of the manufacturer and the part number
of the item, if any, in the appropriate block(s) on the figure E.1 format.
E.4.2.3 Configuration item (CI). Show configuration item specification number for the
item in the designated block on the figure E.1 format when the contract requires development of a
CI specification for the item in accordance with MIL-STD-961.
98
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
E.4.2.4 Item identification data. The elements of data in table E.I are applicable to the
identification and physical characteristics of the item. Information shall be entered on DD Form
2326, Part A as prescribed in table E.I.
E.4.2.5 Preservation and packing data. Table E.II provides the basic elements of data
required in preservation and packing. Information shall be entered on DD Form 2326, Part B as
prescribed in table E.II and as specified in E.4.1.
E.4.2.6 Supplemental data. The elements of data in table E.III are mandatory when
supplemental data is required. A "3" in column 80 of tables E.I and E.II indicate supplemental
data is required. Supplemental data is pertinent to the packaging process and is either a direct
reference to a specific packaging procedural specification or is information that is required in
addition to that shown in the preservation and packing data area (Part B of DD Form 2326).
Supplemental data shall be recorded on DD Form 2326, Part C as described in table E.III.
Narrative shall show only explanatory or instructional type information which directly
supplements the elements of the packaging requirements code in the preservation packing data
areas (DD Form 2326, Part B). Only 59 digits of supplemental data is permitted for any one item.
If the necessary supplemental data would exceed this limit, a SPI shall be prepared in accordance
with instructions in E.5 and Part D of DD Form 2326 shall be executed.
E.4.2.7 Special packaging instruction (SPI) data. A SPI will be developed in accordance
with E.5 when preservation-packing data and supplemental data do not provide sufficient detail to
allow reproduction of the complete package. When a SPI is required, the elements of data in
table E.IV shall be required as applicable. A "4" or "6" in column 80 of tables E.I and E.II
indicates a SPI is required.
E.5 PREPARATION OF SPECIAL PACKAGING INSTRUCTION (SPI)
E.5.1 General. Special packaging instructions shall be developed in accordance with the
appropriate CDRL item (see 6.3). SPIs shall be prepared when the following conditions exist:
a.
When the preservation-packing data area of DD Form 2326 (figure E.1) does not
contain all necessary packaging requirements and
b.
When all necessary packaging requirements to allow complete fabrication and

assembly of the pack cannot be contained in the supplemental data area of DD
Form 2326.
99
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
E.5.2 Format. Unless otherwise specified, DD Form 2169 (figure E.2) shall be used
when a SPI is required. When continuation sheets are required, DD Form 2169C shall be used.
When other engineering drawings are required, they shall be referenced on, and attached to, the
SPI. In no instance shall the drawing size impair the clarity or legibility of the SPI.
E.5.2.1 SPI preparation instructions. (DD Form 2169)
a.
Part or drawing number Enter part or drawing number if no NSN is available.
b.
Commercial and Government Entity (CAGE) Code Provide the 5-digit numerical
code of the packaging design activity assigned in conformance with Cataloging
Handbook H4/H8, Commercial and Government Entity, Name to Code.
c.
SPI number Enter the SPI number provided by the service or agency. The
contractor shall enter the SPI number only when provided by the service or
agency.
d.
National stock number Provide the 13-position National Stock Number

consisting of the 4-position Federal Supply Classification Code, the 9-position
National Item Identification Number and the 2-position Material Management
Aggregation Code (MMAC). Service Management Code or Special Material
Identification Code (SMIC), as applicable. If no NSN is available, provide the 5digit numerical code assigned by Cataloging Handbook H4/H8 to identify the
manufacturer of the part and the drawing or part number. Unless otherwise
specified, enter multiple NSNs if more than one NSN applies.
e.
Date Enter the ordinal date, reflecting the two-position year and three-position
day of the latest revision of the SPI (e.g., February 5, 1999 would be "99036").
f.
Revision Enter the revision symbol as an alphabetic character beginning with an

"A" for the first revision, then proceeding through the alphabet for each
succeeding revision, except that the letters I, O, Q, S, X and Z shall not be used.
g.
QUP State quantity per unit pack (QUP) in-the-clear.
h.
ICQ State intermediate container quantity (ICQ) in-the-clear, for example, the
number of unit packs to be included in the intermediate container.
100
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
i.
Unit pack weight Provide actual unit pack weight to the nearest one tenth of a
pound (i.e., 16.4) (not required for SPIs covering more than one size shipping
container).
j.
Unit pack cube Provide actual cube of the unit pack to the nearest one
thousandth of a cubic foot (i.e., 3.155) (not required for SPIs covering more than
one size shipping container).
k.
Unit pack size Provide the unit container outside dimensions to the nearest one
tenth of an inch in order by length, width and depth (i.e., 15.2 x 14.1 x 12.7) (not
required for SPIs covering more than one size shipping container).
l.
Preservation Include the method of preservation required (see 5.2.3), including

any modification thereto.
m.
Cleaning Provide cleaning requirements in accordance with 5.2.1.
n.
Drying Provide drying requirements in accordance with 5.2.1.
o.
Packing Provide all applicable packing requirements for levels A and B. Closure,
sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with the applicable container
specification or supplemental closure requirements document.
p.
Marking Marking shall be as specified in MIL-STD-129. Special markings

(includes opening and closing instructions) must be given in detail when special
type containers or securing media are used. When specified, include instructions
to mark the SPI number on exterior (other than multiapplication) containers.
q.
Description (bill of materials) List all materials required for complete fabrication
and assembly of the package. All items listed on the bill of material shall be
identified, whenever possible, to applicable federal or military specifications (or
DoD adopted commercial standards) including types, grades, classes, styles, etc.
These items should not be identified by trade name, commercial source, or
commercial specification. Other details regarding materials are specified in
E.5.2.2.3.
r.
Steps List in order of application the materials required for completing the
package.
101
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
s.
Required Fill in the quantity of each material needed to complete the package.
E.5.2.2 Details of completion of SPI. The data given shall be in sufficient detail to
enable the package to be duplicated by the lowest skilled packer. Coding of packaging
requirements in accordance with Appendix J is not permitted unless specified by the requiring
activity. Information contained on government-owned engineering drawings need not be
duplicated on the SPI. When applicable, source maintenance and recoverability codes and
drawing number must appear on all SPIs that do not contain sufficient information to be
duplicated and on preconstructed manufactured containers where the SPI shows assembly
methods only. When details are required for shipping containers, packing data shall be shown for
Levels A and B.
E.5.2.2.1 Additional information. The following additional information shall be shown or
itemized on each SPI:
a.
All intimate wraps.
b.
All cushioning or dunnage, with dimensions. Indicate the specification, style, type,
and class, as applicable.
c.
Special markings (for example, opening and closing instructions when special type
containers or securing media are used, marking of the SPI number on exterior
containers where required, or warning markings).
d.
Bill of materials (as necessary; see Form 2169).
e.
Preservative compound (when applicable).
f.
Inside and outside dimensions of container or completed package. Indicate the

specification, style, type and class (as applicable) of the container or completed
package.
g.
Drawing numbers (when applicable).
h.
Maximum fragility factor for which the SPI is designed, if available.
102
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
E.5.2.2.2 Details. All details required for fabrication of the package, including internal
blocking, bracing, or contour supports shall be shown in their relationship to the item being
packaged. When the instruction covers blocking and bracing of unpacked items, all details
necessary to indicate handling and storage shall be provided, including instructions for cribbing,
hoisting, tie down and supports. Axonometric, scaled perspective, photo drawings or
orthographic drawings may be used to show the various components of the package in relation to
each other and the contained item. Relationships of the component parts of the package may be
shown by exploded or partial exploded views. In some instances clarity is best effected by
showing the item in phantom lines.
E.5.2.2.3 Materials.
E.5.2.2.3.1 Lumber and plywood. Grades or types of lumber and plywood to be used
shall be specified. Direction of surface grain of plywood shall be shown when it is a pertinent
factor. Unless otherwise specified, dimensions listed for lumber cross sections will be nominal
while those listed for lengths are actual. Similarly, cut sizes of plywood sheeting are always
expressed as actual.
E.5.2.2.3.2 Fiberboard. Fiberboard shall be identified as to type, class, variety, and grade
if a particular type is required. Flute size and direction will also be reflected when required for
design of the pack.
E.5.2.2.3.3 Isolation system. Specification, type, grade, class, thickness and density with
load relationship of cushioning materials shall be specified. When shear mounts, vibration
isolators, or other shock mitigation devices are used, they shall be identified and described.
E.5.2.2.3.4 Hardware. Unless otherwise specified, bolts, lag screws, or other like
hardware, shall be of standard commercial grade with MS equivalency indicated, if available.
Types of bolts, such as "carriage" and "machine" shall be indicated.
E.5.2.2.4 Specification containers. Construction details of federal and military
specification containers need not be illustrated, except as necessary to clarify details of the
package. The specification number and type of container shall be shown. All pertinent details
shall be indicated when specification containers are modified. Details for specialized shock
mounts or preformed dunnage, that will duplicate information on drawings prepared in
accordance with MIL-STD-100 shall not be shown. However, the appropriate engineering
drawing numbers shall be indicated.
103
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
E.5.2.2.5 Trade names. All items listed on the bill of materials shall be identified,
whenever possible, to applicable federal, military, or commercial specifications including types,
grades, classes, styles, etc. Such items will not be identified by trade name or commercial source.
When an item is proposed for use that is not covered by any federal or military specification, the
contractor shall provide sufficient background data to demonstrate the benefits to be derived from
its use. When trade names, commercial sources, specification, or part numbers are used, the
phrase "or equal" shall be added to the item identification.
E.5.2.2.6 Application of additional items. Similar items may be applied to a single SPI
provided all interior supports or restraining media of the container as designed for the original
item can be used for these items.
E.5.2.3 Styles. SPIs shall be developed using any one or a combination of the following:
a.
Short narrative.
b.
Axonometric drawings (oblique, cabinet, isometric, diametric, trimetric).
c.
Perspective drawings (developed by projection from orthographic drawings, by

commercially available scaled grids, or by other methods where a scalable
rendering results).
d.
Photo-drawings (high contrast photographs in which all background and

nonpertinent information has been removed).
e.
Computer graphics.
f.
Orthographic drawings (prepared in accordance with MIL-STD-100).
E.5.2.4 Variations in style and format. Unless otherwise specified, DD Form 2169 (figure
E.2) shall be used when a SPI is required. When data is to be received or delivered through an
electronic digital media or on an approved contractor's format, a variation in style and format may
be used provided that the applicable information specified above is included therein.
E.6 APPROVAL OF CONTRACTOR DEVELOPED PACKAGING DATA
E.6.1 Procedures for submitting data for approval. Unless otherwise specified in the
contract, the contractor shall submit for approval the packaging data prepared for each item in
104
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
accordance with E.4 and E.5. Approval shall be obtained prior to production packaging except
for deviations which are in compliance with E.6.1.1 and E.6.1.2 below.
E.6.1.1 Approval of data without National Stock Numbers. Forms shall not be submitted
for approval of packaging data without a National Stock Number (NSN) unless authorized by the
contracting agency or unless emergency shipments are required prior to assignment of a NSN. An
emergency situation is defined as a requirement for direct support of a system when a situation
such as work stoppage or condition status of the system might otherwise prevent it from
performing its mission. Upon receipt of the complete NSN, the contractor shall enter these on the
packaging data form and forward one copy to the DoD contracting activity (packaging
organization) for approval.
E.6.1.2 Approval of data for emergency shipments. When packaging data approval
cannot be obtained prior to initial shipment of material which is directed by an emergency
situation, the packaging data may, upon approval of the administrative contracting officer, be
submitted to the appropriate office simultaneously with shipment of the material. In no case shall
additional shipments of remaining identical items not required for emergency shipments be
allowed prior to data submittal without approval of the DoD contracting officer.
E.6.1.3 Approval of data of interest to one DoD agency. All packaging data which are of
sole interest to a particular DoD service or agency shall be submitted as applicable to the DoD
agency having item management responsibility for approval.
E.6.1.4 Use of background data for approval. The contractor shall make available, when
requested by the responsible DoD contracting activity (packaging organization), sufficient
background data (test reports, drawings or engineering details) to permit the reviewing activity to
determine the adequacy of the contractor prepared packaging data. When specified, certified
laboratory test reports may be used as justification for approval and copies of the report shall be
furnished to the contracting activity (packaging organization).
E.6.1.5 Return of approved data. Upon approval, the DoD contracting activity
(packaging organization) shall return one copy of the approved data to the contractor for file.
Approval shall be indicated by application of the approval stamp on the applicable forms.
E.6.1.5.1 Authentication. SPIs for hazardous materials shall be authenticated by the
responsible DoD activity.
105
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
E.6.1.6 Data for common items. Packaging data for common items using predetermined
codes shall be reviewed and approved at the option of the responsible DoD contracting activity
(packaging organization).
E.6.2 Transmittal of data. The data required by this standard shall be in accordance with
the applicable data item description and must be referenced on the applicable Contract Data
Requirements List (DD Form 1423). Necessary modification to the data item descriptions must
be shown on the DD Form 1423.
E.6.2.1 Preservation and packing data. The contractor shall submit the DD Form 2326
data as outlined below:
a.
Unless otherwise specified on the DD Form 1423, two (2) copies of either DD
Form 2326, or appropriate electronic media when specified, shall be forwarded,
along with a letter of transmittal showing quantity of items for which forms are
submitted, directly to the DoD contracting activity. The letter of transmittal shall
specify the contract and order number and shall list the items for which the forms
are submitted. The DoD contracting activity (packaging organization) shall sign
and return the letter of transmittal with the approved copies of the data.
E.6.2.2 Special packaging instructions. When special packaging instructions are required,
one full sized reproducible master and one reproduced copy of figure E.2., unless otherwise
specified on the DD Form 1423, shall be forwarded to the DoD contracting activity (packaging
organization). Submittals shall be suitably protected to assure delivery of legible copy. Folding of
the master copies is not permitted. When specified, aperture cards may be used. Aperture cards
shall be in a form from which prints can be made. In instances where more than one sheet is
required to describe the packaging, an aperture card shall be prepared for each sheet.
Reproduction of engineering drawings shall be accomplished using standard drawing sheet sizes
A, B, C or D (MIL-STD-100). Sizes A, B or C are preferred. When reduced, the drawing size
shall not impair the clarity of the drawing. The DoD contracting activity (packaging organization)
shall retain the full size master reproducible and return the approved reproduced copy to the
contractor. In the event the contractor requires an approved reproducible master, he shall submit
two masters instead of one.
E.6.2.2.1 Computerized format. SPIs and drawings submitted in computerized format
shall be as specified by the acquiring activity.
E.6.2.3 Method of transmission. Unless otherwise specified, the method of transmission
of data shall be routine mail.
106
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.I. Item identification data for PART A of DD Form 2326.
Column
Number
1
2-6
Element of Data
Document identifier
7-21
National stock
number
22-26
Unpackaged item
weight
Explanation or Instructions
Enter "A" to identify as item identification data.
Reserved for system document control and
identification numbers and applicable prefix
designations.
Show the identification number assigned to the item
of supply (7-10 for Federal Supply Classification
code; 11-19 for National Item Identification Number;
20-21 for Material Management Aggregation Code
(MMAC), Service Management code or Special
Material Identification Code (SMIC), as applicable).
When NSN (Columns 7-19) is not available,
completion of columns 56-79 is mandatory.
Show actual net weight of item to the nearest one
tenth of a pound up to 9,999.9 pounds. Use zeros to
fill voids. For items in excess of 9,999.9 pounds,
show weight in whole pounds indicated as follows:
(a) Show "A" in column 22 and the whole pounds
in columns 23-26. The "A" will indicate that the
numbers entered are to be multiplied by ten to
determine the actual weight (for example,
A9999=99,990 pounds).
(b) Show "B" in column 22 and the whole pounds
in columns 23-26. The "B" will indicate that the
numbers entered are to be multiplied by one
hundred to determine the actual weight (for
example, B9999=999,900 pounds).
107
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.I. Item identification data for PART A of DD Form 2326 - Continued.
Column
Number
22-26
(Cont.)
Element of Data
Unpackaged item
weight (Cont.)
27-38
Unpackaged item
dimensions
39-42
Packaging category
code
43-44
45-47
Not used
Quantity per unit
pack
Intermediate
container quantity
48-50
51-55
Commercial and
Government Entity
code of the
manufacturer of the
part
(c) Show "C" in column 22 and the whole pounds
in columns 23-26. The "C" will indicate that the
numbers listed should be multiplied by 1000 to
determine the actual weight being entered (for
example, C9999=9,999,000 pounds).
Show unpackaged item dimensions as configured for
packaging to the nearest tenth of an inch in order by
length, width, and depth. The largest diameter shall
be used to indicate length or width of cylindrical
items. Dimensions less than .1 inch show as "0001."
Use zeros to fill voids (for example, 0024, 0001)
NOTE: Coilable material shall be coiled and the
overall coiled dimensions used.
In columns 39-40, show the appropriate two-digit
code for the physical and chemical characteristics of
the item using table A.I. In column 41, show the
one-digit code for weight/size/fragility from table
A.II and in column 42 show the one-digit code for
preservative from table A.III.
State quantity per unit pack (QUP) in the clear.
When intermediate containers are used, enter the
number of unit packs to be included in the
intermediate container in-the-clear up to 100. If
there is no requirement for intermediate containers,
enter "0/0/0/".
Enter the 5-digit numerical code, corresponding to
the manufacturer of the part, assigned in
conformance with Cataloging Handbook H4/H8.
108
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.I. Item identification data for PART A of DD Form 2326 Continued.
Column
Number
56-79
80
Element of Data
Drawing or part
number
Part indicator
Enter the drawing or part number of the item being
packaged, as applicable. These columns may be left
blank if NSN information is entered in columns 7-21.
Enter one of the following as appropriate:
(a) If only Part A will be used, enter "1".
(b) If Parts A and B will be used, enter "2".
(c) If Parts A, B, and C will be used, enter "3".
(d) If Parts A, B and D will be used, enter "4".
(e) If only Parts A and C will be used, enter "5".
(f) If Parts A, B, C, and D will be used, enter "6".
109
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.II. Preservation - Packing data for PART B of DD Form 2326.
Column
Number
1
2-6
Element of Data
Document identifier
7-21
National stock
number
22-28
29-30
Not used
Method of
preservation
Enter "B" to identify as preservation-packing data.
designations.
(MMAC), Service Management Code or Special
Select appropriate code from tables J.I and J.Ia.
Determination of method of preservation shall be
based on one of the following:
(a) Table A.I. Identify the appropriate method
applicable to the item in accordance with 5.2.3.
31
Cleaning procedure
32-33
Preservative material
34-35
Wrap
36-37
Cushioning and
dunnage
Cushioning thickness
38
39-40
41
Unit container
(b) Table A.IV for common group items.

Select appropriate code from table J.II or table A.IV.
for common group items.
Select appropriate code from table J.III or table A.IV
Select appropriate code from table J.IV or table
A.IV for common group items.
Select appropriate code from table J.V or table A.IV
Select appropriate code from table J.VI or table
A.IV for common group items.
Select appropriate code from table J.VII or table
A.IV for common group items. Note: If the unit
container is also the shipping container, the level of
protection limitations of table C.II must be met.
Not used
110
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.II. Preservation - Packing data for PART B of DD Form 2326 - Continued.
Column
Number
42-43
Element of Data
Select appropriate code from table J.VII.
44
45-46
Intermediate
container
Unit container level
Special marking
47
48
49
50-54
Level A packing
Level B packing
Minimal packing
Unit pack weight
Select appropriate code from table J.VIII.

Select appropriate code from table J.X. When more
than one code or when any special marking not
included in the table must be specified, show "ZZ"
and specify in supplemental data.
Select appropriate code from table J.IX.
Select appropriate code from table J.IX.
If applicable, select code from table J.IXa.
Show actual unit pack weight in-the-clear to the
nearest one tenth of a pound up to 9,999.9 pounds.
Use zeros to fill voids. For packs in excess of
9,999.9 pounds, show weight in whole pounds
indicated as follows:
(a) Show "A" in column 44 and the whole pounds
in columns 45-48. The "A" will indicate that the
numbers entered are to be multiplied by ten to
A9999=99,990 pounds).
(b) Show "B" in column 44 and the whole pounds
in columns 45-48. The "B" will indicate that the
numbers listed should be multiplied by one
hundred to determine the actual weight (for
example, B9999=999,900 pounds).
(c) Show "C" in column 44 and the whole pounds
in columns 45-48. The "C" will indicate that the
numbers listed should be multiplied by 1000 to
C9999=9,999,000 pounds).
111
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.II. Preservation - Packing data for PART B of DD Form 2326 - Continued.
Column
Number
55-66
Unit pack size
67-73
Unit pack cube
74-78
79
Not used
Optional procedure
indicator
Part indicator
80
Element of Data
Show unit container outside dimensions in-the-clear
to the nearest tenth of an inch in order by length,
width, and depth. Use "0001" to show dimensions
less than .1 of an inch. Use zeros to fill voids (for
example, "0024", "0001").
Show actual cube of the unit pack to the nearest one
thousandth of a cubic foot up to 9,999.999 cubic
feet. For items with cube in excess of 9,999.999
cubic feet, show X in column 67 and indicate cube in
whole cubic feet in columns 68-73.
Select appropriate code from table J.VIIIa.
Enter one of the following as appropriate:
(a) If Parts A and B will be used, enter "2".
(b) If Parts A, B and C will be used, enter "3".
(c) If Parts A, B, and D will be used, enter "4".
(d) If Parts A, B, C, and D will be used, enter "6".
112
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.III. Supplemental data for PART C of DD Form 2326.
Column
Number
1
2-6
Element of Data
Document identifier
7-21
National stock
number
22-80
In-the-clear
instructions
Enter "C" to identify as supplemental data.
designations.
If there is an applicable procedural specification for
the item being packaged, and the packaging
requirements are adequately defined therein, enter
two asterisks followed by the specification number
beginning in column 22. For example, the
information shall be entered as follows:
**MIL-X-XXXXX
Supplemental instructions, such as specific method(s)
of preservation, may be added as appropriate.
In the absence of an applicable procedural
specification, enter descriptive packaging instructions
in-the-clear using a maximum of 59 characters.
The following are examples of data entry:
(a) APPLY PRESERVE 0/2 ON BARE AREA.
(Note that code for appropriate preservative is
selected from table J.III)
113
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.III. Supplemental data for PART C of DD Form 2326 Continued.
Column
Number
22-80
(Cont.)
Element of Data
(b) CUSHION ENDS WITH BG. (Note that
code for appropriate material is selected from
table J.V.)
(c) PLACE DIPSTICK IN BE BAG AND
SECURE TO VALVE. (The code for
appropriate bag is selected from table J.VII.)
114
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
TABLE E.IV. Special packaging instruction data for PART D of DD Form 2326.
Column
Number
1
Element of Data
Document identifier
2-6
7-21
National stock
number
22-26
Packaging design
activity code
identification number
SPI number
27-36
37
Revision
38-40
41-45
Not used
SPI date
46-61
Container NSN
62-80
Not used
Enter "D" to identify special packaging instruction
data.
designations.
Enter the 5-digit numerical CAGE code of the
packaging design activity, assigned in conformance
with Cataloging Handbook H4/H8.
Enter the SPI number provided by the service or
agency. In column 27, one of the following alpha
characters will be used:
A - Army
M - Marine Corps
D - DLA
N - Navy
F - Air Force
Enter the revision symbol as an alphabetic character
beginning with an "A" for the first revision, then
proceeding through the alphabet for each succeeding
revision, except do not use I, O, Q, S, X and Z.
Enter the ordinal date, reflecting the two-position
year and three-position day of the last revision of the
SPI (for example, April 15, 1999 would be "99105").
Do not use spaces or dashes.
Show the National Stock Number of the long-life
container required, if applicable.
115
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
APPROVAL STAMP
FORM APPROVED
OMB No. 0704-0188
PRESERVATION AND PACKING DATA
NOMENCLATURE
DESIGN ACTIVITY'S PART NUMBER
MANUFACTURER'S CAGE CODE
CONFIGURATION ITEM SPECIFICATION NUMBER
IT E M I D E N T I F I C A T I O N D A T A ( P A R T A )
NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER
ITEM WEIGHT
LENGTH
WIDTH
DEPTH
CAT
DOC CON
FSC
1
NIIN
10
11
12
13
14
15
ADDL
16
17
18
19
20
21
POUNDS
22
23
24
10th
25
26
INCHES
27
28
10th
29
30
INCHES
31
32
10th
33
34
INCHES
35
36
10th
37
38
P/C
39
40
CODE
QUP
WSF
41
ICQ
CAGE
P
I
DRAWING OR PART NUMBER
P
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
PRES
METH
PRES
MTL
29
31
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
PRESERVATION - PACKING DATA (PART B)

DOC CON
FSC
1
NIIN
U
C
L
SPEC
PACKING
MKG
44
45
47
48
10
11
12
13
14
15
ADDL
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
30
32
33
WRAP
MTL
CUSH
DUNN
C
T
UNIT
CONT
34
36
38
39
40
O
P
I
PI
35
37
INT
CTR
41
42
43
46
MIN
49
UNIT PACK WT
WEIGHT (LBS.)
50
51
52
53
UNIT PACK SIZE (IN.)

LENGTH
10th
54
55
56
57
WIDTH
10th
58
59
10th
60
61
62
UNIT PACK CUBE (CU.FT.)

DEPTH
63
10th
64
65
66
WHOLE CUBE
67
68
69
1000 th
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
SUPPLEMENTAL DATA (PART C)

SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS
DOC CON
FSC
1
NIIN
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
10
11
12
13
14
15
ADDL
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS
41
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
SPECIAL PACKAGING INSTRUCTION DATA (PART D)

PKG DESIGN
ACT CAGE
DOC CON
FSC
1
NIIN
10
11
12
13
14
15
ADDL
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
R
E
V
SPI NUMBER
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
CONTAINER NATIONAL STOCK NUMBER

SPI DATE
FSC
41
42
43
44
45
DD FORM 2326, SEP 97

S/N: 0102-LF-114-7000
46
47
48
NIIN
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
ADDL
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE.
FIGURE E.1. Preservation and Packing Data.
116
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
Form Approved
OMB No. 0704-0188
SPECIAL PACKAGING INSTRUCTION
1. PART OR DRAWING NO.
2. CAGE
3. SPI NO.
4. NATIONAL STOCK NO.
5. DATE
6. REVISION
10. UNIT PACK CU
11. UNIT PACK SIZE
7. QUP
8. ICQ
12. MILITARY PRESERVATION
9. UNIT PACK WT.
18.
19.
20.
STEPS
REQD
DESCRIPTION
13. CLEANING
14. DRYING
15. PACKING
a. LEVEL A
b. LEVEL B
16. MARKING
17. NOTES/DRAWING
DD FORM 2169 JUN 1997

S/N: 0102-LF-114-6800
PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE.
Page
of
Pages
Designed using Perform Pro, WHS/DIOR, Jun 97
FIGURE E.2. Special Packaging Instruction

117
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX E
Form Approved
OMB No. 0704-0188
SPECIAL PACKAGING INSTRUCTION (Continuation Sheet)
1. PART OR DRAWING NO.
2. CAGE
3. SPI NO.
4. NATIONAL STOCK NO.
5. DATE
6. REVISION
DD FORM 2169C JUN 1997

S/N: 0102-LF-114-6900
Previous editions are obsolete.
FIGURE E.2. Special Packaging Instruction Continued.
118
Page
of
Pages
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX F
MILITARY PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION PROVISIONS
F.1 SCOPE. This appendix outlines the procedure for conducting appropriate tests to validate
specific military package designs when such testing is required (see 5.6). This appendix is a
mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance, as
applicable.
F.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
F.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections F.3, F.4, and
F.5 of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list,
sections F.3, F.4, and F.5 of this appendix whether or not they are listed.
F.2.2 Government documents.
F.2.2.1 Standards. The following standard forms a part of this document to the extent
specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issue of this document is that listed in the issue
of the Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards (DoDISS) and supplement
thereto, cited in the solicitation (see 6.2).
STANDARDS
MILITARY
MIL-STD-1660
Design Criteria for Ammunition Unit Loads.
19111-5094.)
F.2.2.2 Other Government documents. The following other Government documents form
a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues are
those cited in the solicitation.
119
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX F
CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
29 CFR
Labor
40 CFR
Protection of Environment
49 CFR
Transportation

F.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this
Dangerous Goods Regulations
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code
ASTM-D4169 -
Performance Testing of Shipping Containers and Systems

(DoD adopted).
Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)
120
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX F
F.3 GENERAL
F.3.1 Packaging design validation tests. Except for hazardous materials package testing,
packaging design validation tests shall consist of the following tests and examinations in sequence:
a.
The applicable performance tests of ASTM-D4169
b.
The applicable preservation inspections of Appendix G
F.3.2 Hazardous material. Testing of hazardous material packages shall be in accordance

with the applicable requirements for performance packaging contained in the International Air
Transport Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations or the International Maritime
Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG), and with the Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Title 29, Title
40, and Title 49. These test results shall be documented as specified on the Contract Data
Requirements List (see 6.3).
F.3.3 Ammunition unit loads. Ammunition unit load test requirements are stated in MILSTD-1660.
F.4 TEST METHODS
F.4.1 Container performance tests. The container shall be subjected to the tests specified
for Distribution Cycle 18 of ASTM-D4169 and the following Assurance Levels:
a.
For Level A packs Assurance Level 1.
b.
For Level B packs Assurance Level 2.
F.4.2 Preservation tests. Preservation tests shall be in accordance with G.4.

F.5 OTHER
F.5.1 Acceptance criteria and disposition of test samples. Procedures as specified in
ASTM-D4169 for Government shipments shall apply.
121
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX G
QUALITY ASSURANCE PROVISIONS
G.1 SCOPE. This appendix outlines the requirements for conducting appropriate quality
conformance inspection tests on all military packages delivered under the provisions of this
standard. This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is
intended for compliance, as applicable.
G.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
G.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections G.3 and G.4
of this appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list,
sections G.3 and G.4 of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.
G.2.2 Government documents.
G.2.2.1 Specifications and standards. The following specifications and standards form a
SPECIFICATIONS
FEDERAL
A-A-3174
MIL-B-121
MIL-PRF-131
MIL-D-16791
MIL-B-22020
MIL-PRF-22191
Barrier Material, Greaseproofed,

Waterproofed, Flexible.
Barrier Materials, Watervaporproof,
Greaseproof, Flexible, Heat Sealable.
Detergent, General Purpose (Liquid,
Nonionic).
Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable,
Barrier Material, Transparent, Flexible, Heat
Sealable.
MILITARY
122
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX G
STANDARDS
FEDERAL
FED-STD-101
MILITARY
MIL-STD-129
19111-5094.)
G.3 GENERAL
G.3.1 Quality system. The contractor's quality system shall be as specified in the
contract.
G.3.2 Quality assurance requirements. Quality assurance requirements shall be in
accordance with the contract. In addition, the applicable tests in G.4 and G.5 are mandatory.
G.3.3 Sampling.
G.3.3.1 Lot size. An inspection lot shall consist of all items manufactured during one
production run and packaged by the same process using the same packaging materials.
G.3.3.2 Sampling for inspection. Completed packs shall be withdrawn from each lot in a
random manner to make a representative sample sufficient in size to conduct all applicable
inspections and tests as specified in G.4 and G.5.
G.4 PRESERVATION INSPECTIONS
G.4.1 Visual preservation examinations. Visually examine all test packages to determine
compliance with the requirements of this standard. Specific defects that indicate quality problems
are listed in table G.I.
G.4.2 Leakage test. Requirements for this inspection are based on the method of
preservation utilized in the packaging process. Applicable methods of preservation are listed in
123
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX G
table G.II. When applicable, the unit pack should be tested for leaks in accordance with one of
the following techniques (tests) of Method 5009, FED-STD-101. Containers, wraps and
cushioning used outside the waterproof or watervaporproof carrier shall be removed prior to
testing. The time that the item and all processing materials have been maintained at ambient
conditions prior to or during the processing period may be considered a part of the conditioning
time.
G.4.2.1 Wetting agent. As an alternative to the use of the aerosol solution recommended
by Method 5009, FED-STD-101, a solution of 4 grams of water-soluble detergent, conforming to
Type I of MIL-D-16791, per gallon of test water may be used to release entrapped air so that
actual leakage of air through the barrier may be detected.
G.4.2.2 Selection of technique. The most appropriate technique will depend principally
upon the construction, size and weight of the unit pack and the information needed. The hot
water technique is appropriate for large unit packs. The squeeze technique is appropriate for
small unit packs constructed of flexible materials such as plastic film. The vacuum retention
technique does not specifically locate leaks and may not indicate the existence of tiny leaks in a
large unit pack. The submersion (or immersion) technique for detecting water leakage is not as
sensitive as the air leakage tests, but it is appropriate to reveal whether or not water might leak
into the unit packs and, depending upon the duration of the test, gives some indication of the
extent to which the materials used in the pack are waterproof. The pneumatic pressure technique
is primarily appropriate for rigid containers. Neither the hot water nor the pneumatic pressure
techniques are appropriate for rigid containers that are sealed with tapes; the submersion
technique must be used.
G.4.2.2.1 Vacuum retention technique.
G.4.2.2.1.1 Sealed rigid container. When the air in the sealed system has been evacuated
to a constant specified pressure, allow the sealed system to remain undisturbed for 10 minutes.
Note the pressure on the vacuum pressure gage. Loss of vacuum shall not exceed twenty-five
percent of the original vacuum.
G.4.2.2.1.2 Sealed flexible bag. Sufficient air shall be drawn from the bag to cause the
bag material to cling snugly to the enclosed item. Allow the bag to remain undisturbed for two
hours at ambient temperature. Grasp the bag and draw it away from the item; then release it
quickly. The bag shall remain taut and cling to the item. The loss of vacuum shall not cause the
flexible bag to lose its tautness.
124
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX G
G.4.2.2.2 Submersion (or immersion) technique. After submersion and before opening
the sealed system, carefully dry the outside. Open the sealed system and note whether leakage has
occurred. There shall be no evidence of moisture within the bag.
G.4.2.2.3 Pneumatic pressure technique. When the sealed system is pressurized to a
constant specified pressure and the line to the compressed air supply is closed, read and record the
initial pressure. After thirty minutes, read and record the final gage pressure. There shall be no
loss of gage pressure. When a water solution or immersion procedure is used or when required to
pinpoint leaks, coat surfaces with a soap solution or submerge the system under water. There
shall be no evidence of air leakage indicated by soap bubbles increasing in size, being blown away
be escaping air, or by the presence of a steady stream of bubbles from any surface.
G.4.2.2.4 Hot water technique. All samples shall be conditioned at ambient conditions at
least four hours prior to performing this test. Observe evolution of air bubbles at each position of
the sample. There shall not be a steady stream or recurring succession of bubbles from any
surface or seam. Bubbles which appear on the surface of the unit pack but are not released or are
released at a slowly decreasing rate are not to be construed as indication of failure.
G.4.2.2.5 Squeeze technique (applicable only to flexible specimens). During sealing, as
much air as possible shall be entrapped within the flexible bag at ambient conditions. When the
bag is squeezed to increase the internal air pressure of the container, there shall not be a steady
stream or recurring succession of bubbles from any surface or seam.
G.4.3 Heat-sealed seam test. Requirements for conducting the test are also based on the
method of preservation utilized in the packaging process. Applicable methods of preservation are
listed in table G.II.
G.4.3.1 Selection of samples for heat-sealed seam tests. Sections of the heat seals shall
be obtained from sealed unit packs. Only one heat seal specimen shall be obtained from one
sealed unit pack.
G.4.3.1.1 Alternate sampling procedure for heat-sealed seam test. When heat seals are
made with equipment designed to control the temperature, dwell time and pressure, test samples
may be prepared from specimen heat seals in lieu of taking samples directly from heat sealed
packs as specified in G.4.3.1. Specimen heat seals shall all be prepared daily prior to production
from sample(s) of each material sealed on each sealing device. Machine settings used in
production shall be identical with the settings used in fabrication of test specimens. In cases
where any of the alternately prepared heat seal specimens fail the seam strength test, tests of heat
125
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX G
seals from actual unit packs shall be performed as necessary to assure that unit pack seals meet
the requirements of G.4.3.2.
G.4.3.2 Performance of heat-sealed seam test. The heat-sealed seam test shall be
performed in accordance with Method 2024 of FED-STD-101, at normal room (ambient)
temperature using the static load weight as specified therein, except that when barrier materials
conform to MIL-B-121, the static load weight shall be 36 2 ounces. When barrier materials
conform to A-A-3174, MIL-PRF-131 or MIL-PRF-22191, the static load weight shall be 50
ounces 2 ounces. A five percent reduction in static load weight is permitted when the room
temperature in the test area exceeds 90F. Heat seals shall not separate during the final three
minutes of the test. Partial separation in the area of partial fusion adjacent to the actual seal is
acceptable within the first two minutes of the test.
G.5 PACKING INSPECTIONS
G.5.1 Examination procedures. Each sample intermediate or shipping container shall be
visually inspected for the following deficiencies:
Container material(s) not as specified.
Container construction not as specified.
Container size not as specified.
Closure material(s) not as specified.
Closure locations not as specified.
Markings incomplete.
Markings illegible.
Markings incorrectly located.
126
127
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
20
X
X
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Shake
Weigh &
measure
Visual
Visual
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10
X
X
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Visual
Method of
Inspection
Visual
Visual
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
31
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
32
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
33
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
41
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
42
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Method
43
44
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
45
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
51
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
52
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
53
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
54
X
X
S
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
55
X
X
NOTES:
1/
For methods 42 and 52, unit pack marking of MIL-STD-129 shall be applied to the barrier bag as well as the outer container.
2/
When a box or container is used to effect the unit pack of methods 31, 33, 41 and 51, unit pack markings of MIL-STD-129 shall be applied to the barrier bag as well as the box specified
to effect the unit pack.
3/
When the unit pack is also used as the shipping container, then the markings applicable for shipment shall be applied to the exterior container in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
Incorrect QUP
Marking omitted, incorrect, or illegible 1/ 2/ 3/
Criteria
Criteria
Cleaning materials not as specified
Cleaning material contaminated
Item not completely cleaned when tested in accordance with
Method 4004 of Federal Test Method Standard 101
Item damaged by action of cleaning process
Item contaminated by handling after cleaning
Item not completely dry
Item damaged by compressed air blast or overheating
Contaminated compressed air used
Contaminated wiping cloths used
Preservative not as specified
Incomplete or non-uniform coverage of preservative
Excessive preservative
Item not thoroughly drained
Wrap not as specified
Cushioning material not as specified
Cushioning thickness not as specified
Projections and sharp edges of item not sufficiently cushioned
to prevent damage to item or external media
Improper application of cushioning, blocking, bracing or bolting
bolting
Improper amount of desiccant
Desiccant improperly secured
Desiccant contacting item
Humidity indicator not properly placed
Window or gaskets not as specified
Unit container not as specified
Interior unit container corners not blunted
Insufficient material for reclosure of flexible barriers
Improper seal or closure of unit containers
Excessive air within unit container
Excessive looseness in unit container
Weight and cube of unit pack exceeds maximum allowable
TABLE G.I. Preservation inspection provisions.
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX G
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX G
TABLE G.II. Leakage and heat-sealed seam test provisions.
Method or Submethod
Leak Test
(See G.4.2)
31
32
33
41
42
43
44
45
51
52
53
54
55
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Required
Heat-sealed
seam test
(See G.4.3)
Required 1/
Required
Required 1/
Required
Required
Required
--Required
Required
Required
---
NOTES:
1/
A cold-sealed seam test as defined in MIL-B-22020 shall be substituted in

cases where a VCI treated cold-sealed bag is employed as the unit container.
128
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX H
PROCEDURES FOR COMPLIANCE WITH CONTAINER
DESIGN RETRIEVAL SYSTEM (CDRS) REQUIREMENTS
H.1 SCOPE. This appendix outlines the procedures to be followed to insure compliance with the
requirements of the Container Design Retrieval System (CDRS). This appendix is a mandatory
part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended for compliance, as applicable.
H.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.
H.3 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS.
H.3.1 Design search request submittal. After the development activity has established a
requirement for a specialized container, the configuration of the contents is reasonably firm, and
protection levels have been tentatively established, CDRS services shall be solicited before
initiating detailed engineering design of the needed container. The development activity shall: (1)
identify packaging requirements for which a specialized reusable container is required, (2) prepare
a search request, and (3) submit the search request to the CDRS Management Office
(CDRS/MO). The CDRS/MO mailing address is AAC/WMG, Eglin AFB, FL 32542-5000.
DoD in-house container development activities shall submit the search request directly to
CDRS/MO. DoD contractors must submit copies of search requests to their respective contract
administrative office and as specified on the Contract Data Requirements List (see 6.3).
H.3.2 CDRS/MO search response. The CDRS/MO will identify reusable specialized
container designs and assets suitable to fulfill the requirements of the development activity. The
CDRS/MO will provide technical guidance on the use of a design(s) retrieved from the CDRS
data base and considered technically/logistically suitable to satisfy the new requirement. The
CDRS/MO will also determine whether or not container assets (conforming to the retrieved
design(s)) are available for use in the new program and provide applicable inventory management
information to the development activity. The CDRS/MO response will be submitted to the
requester within 60 days after receipt of the search request and descriptive data. The contractor
shall, unless otherwise authorized, withhold container development for the item involved pending
receipt of the CDRS search response.
H.3.3 Design activity action on CDRS/MO response. Upon receipt of response from
CDRS/MO, the design activity shall initiate appropriate action based upon the CDRS/MO
129
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX H
proposal and the terms of the contract. Contractor interactions with the government shall be
through the Administrative Contracting Officer (and the Acquiring Contracting Officer where
appropriate) to ensure that all changes are accomplished in strict accordance with applicable
contract terms. Under no circumstances may response from CDRS/MO only, without firm
direction from the Acquiring Contracting Officer, be interpreted as an instruction from the
government to change contract terms or to do work beyond that which is explicitly specified in
the contract.
H.3.3.1 Negative response from CDRS/MO. If response is negative, the design activity
shall complete the allocated baseline for the needed container and, if the end item hardware is to
be delivered under the contract, shall proceed with the design, required test and evaluation, and
documentation of the new specialized reusable container design in time to meet contract
obligations.
H.3.3.1.1 Submittal of container design data. Upon completion of a new or modified
container design, including any required testing and documentation, the design activity shall
submit design data to CDRS/MO for incorporation into the CDRS data base, as specified on the
Contract Data Requirements List (see 6.3).
H.3.3.2 Positive response from CDRS/MO. When a potentially suitable design(s) is
provided by the CDRS/MO, the development activity shall obtain (from the cognizant engineering
activity) additional data on the proposed design(s) that may be required, and complete an
engineering analysis to the extent necessary to determine the feasibility of using the proposed
design(s). If a determination is made that the proposed design(s) is not suitable, the development
activity shall justify nonselection of the proposed design to the program office, with a copy to
CDRS. The cost analysis shall include consideration of the use of any surplus container assets
that may be available. If the development activity is a contractor, the approval of the Acquiring
Contracting Office shall be obtained prior to initiation of a new container development effort.
H.3.3.2.1 Item (Inventory) manager notification. Whenever application of the foregoing
procedures produces a potential usage for a container already in the DoD inventory, the design
activity (through the Administrative Contracting Officer, if a contractor) shall promptly notify the
designated inventory (item) manager of such potential usage, inquire as to actual availability of the
containers and request a freeze on disposal of these assets.
H.3.3.2.2 Container design agent notification. Where a reusable container design is to be
used for a new or existing end item, the design agent for that container shall be promptly
130
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX H
informed to ensure that this usage is properly recorded and to insure adequate configuration
management coordination and control in the future. This requirement extends to individual piece
parts of the container which are being used as-is in the new design and a new drawing is not being
made.
131
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENT CODES
J.1 SCOPE. This appendix establishes and defines codes to be used in describing military
packaging methods and materials when developing packaging data as prescribed in Appendix E.
This appendix is a mandatory part of this standard. The information contained herein is intended
for compliance.
J.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
J.2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in section J.4 of this
appendix. While every effort has been made to ensure the completeness of this list, document
users are cautioned that they must meet all specified requirements documents cited in section J.4
of this appendix, whether or not they are listed.
J.2.2 Government documents.
J.2.2.1 Specifications, standards and handbooks. The following specifications, standards
and handbooks form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise
specified, the issues of these documents are those listed in the issue of the Department of Defense
Index of Specifications and Standards (DoDISS) and supplement thereto, cited in the solicitation
(see 6.2).
SPECIFICATIONS
FEDERAL
A-A-160
A-A-203
A-A-550
A-A-881
A-A-1051
A-A-1249
A-A-1507
A-A-1588
A-A-1898
A-A-2714
A-A-2807
Sack, Shipping, Paper (Cushioned).

Paper, Kraft, Untreated.
Bags, Paper (Grocery, Self Opening).
Bags, Shipping, Burlap.
Paperboard, Wrapping and Cushioning.
Paper, Wrapping, Tissue.
Chipboard.
Sack, Shipping, Paper (Cushioned with Closed Cell Plastic
Film).
Cushioning Material, Cellulosic, Packaging.
Bag, Cloth, Mailing.
Box, File.
132
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
FEDERAL (continued)
A-A-3129
A-A-3174
A-A-50177
A-A-55057
A-A-59135
A-A-59136
QQ-A-1876
VV-L-800
MMM-A-260 PPP-B-26
PPP-B-566
PPP-B-585
PPP-B-601
PPP-B-621
PPP-B-676
PPP-B-1055
PPP-B-1672
PPP-C-96
PPP-C-795
PPP-C-850
PPP-C-1120
PPP-C-1797
PPP-D-723
PPP-D-729
PPP-T-495
Cushioning Material, Flexible Open Cell Plastic Film

Paper, Lens.
Panels, Wood/Wood Based; Construction and Decorative.
Packaging Material, Sheet.
Cushioning Material, Packaging, Closed Cell Foam Plank.
Aluminum Foil.
Lubricating Oil, General Purpose, Preservative (Water
Displacing, Low Temperature).
Adhesive, Water-Resistant (For Sealing Waterproofed
Paper).
Bag, Plastic (General Purpose).
Boxes, Folding, Paperboard.
Boxes, Wood, Wirebound.
Boxes, Wood, Cleated-Plywood.
Boxes, Wood, Nailed and Lock-Corner.
Boxes, Setup.
Barrier Material, Waterproof, Flexible.
Boxes, Shipping, Reusable With Cushioning.
Cans, Metal, 28 Gage and Lighter.
Cushioning Material, Packaging (Flexible Closed Cell
Plastic Film for Long Shipping Cycle Applications).
Cushioning Material, Polystyrene Expanded, Resilient (for
Packaging Uses).
Cushioning Material, Uncompressed Bound Fiber for
Packaging.
Cushioning Material, Resilient, Low Density, Unicellular,
Polypropylene Foam.
Drums, Fiber.
Drums, Shipping and Storage, Steel, 55 Gallon (208 Liters).
Tubes, Mailing and Filing.
133
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
MILITARY
MIL-C-104
MIL-B-117
MIL-B-121
MIL-P-130
MIL-PRF-131
MIL-P-149
MIL-B-2427 MIL-PRF-3150 MIL-PRF-3420 MIL-C-3774
MIL-D-6054
MIL-D-6055
MIL-PRF-6081
MIL-PRF-6085
MIL-C-6529
MIL-PRF-7808
MIL-PRF-7870 MIL-PRF-8188 MIL-PRF-10924 MIL-PRF-11264 -
MIL-C-11796
MIL-PRF-16173 MIL-C-16555
Crates, Wood: Lumber and Plywood Sheathed, Nailed, and

Bolted.
Barrier Material, Greaseproofed, Waterproofed, Flexible.
Paper, Wrapping, Laminated and Creped.
Barrier Materials, Watervaporproof, Greaseproof, Flexible,
Heat-Sealable.
Plastic Coating Compound, Strippable (Hot Dipping).
Box, Ammunition Packing, Wood, Nailed.
Lubricating Oil, Preservative, Medium.
Packaging Materials, Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor Treated,
Opaque.
Crates, Wood; Open 12,000- and 16,000-Pound Capacity.
Drum, Metal - Shipping and Storage.
Drum, Metal Reusable, Shipping and Storage (Cap. 88 to
510 cubic inches).
Lubricating Oil, Jet Engine.
Lubricating Oil: Instrument, Aircraft, Low Volatility.
Corrosion Preventive, Aircraft Engine.
Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Synthetic Base,
NATO Code Number 0-148.
Lubricating Oil: General Purpose, Low Temperature.
Corrosion-Preventive Oil, Gas Turbine Engine, Aircraft
Synthetic Base.
Grease, Automotive and Artillery.
Container: Shipping, Reusable, for Tank Automotive
Engines, Transmissions, Differentials, Transfers, Final
Drives, Drive Axles, and Similar Assemblies.
Corrosion Preventive Compound, Petrolatum, Hot
Application.
Corrosion Preventive Compound, Solvent Cutback, Cold
Application.
Coating Compound, Strippable, Sprayable.
134
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
MIL-P-17667
MIL-P-19644
MIL-PRF-20092 MIL-PRF-21260 MIL-PRF-22019 MIL-B-22020
MIL-PRF-22191 MIL-PRF-23699 MIL-PRF-23827 MIL-G-25537 MIL-B-26195 MIL-PRF-26514 MIL-P-46002 MIL-L-46010 MIL-H-46170 MIL-B-46176
MIL-B-46506
MIL-P-53030
MIL-PRF-81322 MIL-PRF-81705 MIL-P-81997
Paper, Wrapping, Chemically Neutral (Non-Corrosive).

Plastic Molding Material (Polystyrene Foam, Expanded
Bead).
Rubber or Plastic Sheets and Assembled and Molded
Shapes, Synthetic, Foam or Sponge, Open Cell.
Lubricating Oil, Internal Combustion Engine, Preservative
and Break-In.
Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable, Volatile
Corrosion Inhibitor Treated.
Bags, Transparent, Flexible, Sealable, Volatile Corrosion
Inhibitor Treated.
Barrier Materials, Transparent, Flexible, Heat Sealable.
Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Turbine Engine, Synthetic Base,
NATO Code Number 0-156.
Grease, Aircraft and Instrument, Gear and Actuator Screw,
NATO Code Number G-354, Metric.
Grease, Aircraft, Helicopter Oscillating Bearing.
Boxes, Wood-Cleated, Skidded, Load-Bearing Base.
Polyurethane Foam, Rigid or Flexible; for Packaging.
Preservative Oil, Contact and Volatile Corrosion-Inhibited.
Lubricant, Solid Film, Heat Cured, Corrosion Inhibiting.
Hydraulic Fluid, Rust Inhibited, Fire Resistant, Synthetic
Hydrocarbon Base.
Brake Fluid, Silicone, Automotive, All Weather,
Operational and Preservative, Metric.
Boxes, Ammunition Packing, Wood, Wirebound.
Primer Coating, Epoxy, Water Reducible, Lead and
Chromate Free.
Grease, Aircraft, General Purpose, Wide Temperature
Range.
Barrier Materials, Flexible, Electrostatic Protective, Heat
Sealable.
Pouches, Cushioned, Flexible, Electrostatic Free,
Reclosable, Transparent.
135
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
MIL-PRF-83282 -
Hydraulic Fluid, Fire Resistant, Synthetic Hydrocarbon

Base, Aircraft, Metric, NATO Code No. H-537.
Foam-in-Place Packaging Materials, General Specification
for.
MIL-PRF-83671 -
STANDARDS
MILITARY
MIL-STD-129
MIL-STD-1186

Cushioning, Anchoring, Bracing, Blocking and
Waterproofing, with Appropriate Test Methods.
(Unless otherwise indicated, copies of federal and military specifications, standards, and
handbooks are available from the Standardization Documents Order Desk, 700 Robbins Avenue,
Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094.)
DRAWINGS
WARNER ROBINS AIR LOGISTICS CENTER DRAWINGS
11214-5002-100
11214-5002-200
11214-5002-300
11214-5002-400

(These drawings may be obtained from WR-ALC/TILAS, 420 Second St., Suite 100,
Robins AFB, GA 31098-1640.)
NAVICP DRAWINGS
P069
13414
15024
15450
Container, Molded, Reusable.

Container, Modular, Reusable.
Container, Modular, Reusable
136
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
(These drawings may be obtained from NAVICP (Attn: 0712), 700 Robbins Avenue,
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5098.)
J.2.2.2 Other Government documents, drawings and publications. The following other
Government documents form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless
otherwise specified, the issues are those cited in the solicitation.
CODES OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS
29 CFR
40 CFR
49 CFR
Labor.
Transportation.

J.2.3 Non-Government publications. The following documents form a part of this
which are DoD adopted are those listed in the issue of the DODISS cited in the solicitation.
Unless otherwise specified, the issues of documents not listed in the DODISS are the issues of the
ASTM-D4169
ASTM-D4727
ASTM-D5118
ASTM-D5168
ASTM-D5486
ASTM-D6039
ASTM-D6251
- Performance Testing of Shipping Containers and Systems

(DoD adopted).
- Specification for Corrugated and Solid Fiberboard Sheet
Stock (Container Grade) and Cut Shapes (DoD adopted).
- Fabrication of Fiberboard Shipping Boxes.
- Fabrication and Closure of Triple Wall Corrugated
Fiberboard Containers (DoD adopted).
- Pressure Sensitive Tape for Packaging, Box Closure and
Sealing (DoD adopted).
- Crates, Wood, Open and Covered (DoD adopted).
- Natural Wood-Cleated Panelboard Shipping Boxes (DoD
adopted).
Materials, 100 Barr Harbor Drive, West Conshohocken, PA 19428-2959.)
137
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Dangerous Goods Regulations.
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code.
AEROSPACE INDUSTRIES ASSOCIATION OF AMERICA, INC.
NAS847 -
Caps and Plugs, Protective, Dust and Moisture Seal.
(Application for copies should be addressed to the Aerospace Industries Association of America,
Inc., 1250 Eye Street, N.W., Washington, DC 20005-3924.)
SOCIETY OF AUTOMOTIVE ENGINEERS
SAE-J1966 -
Lubricating Oil, Aircraft Piston Engine (Non-Dispersant Mineral

Oil)
(Application for copies should be addressed to the Society of Automotive Engineers, 400
Commonwealth Drive, Warrendale, PA 15096.)
J.3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
J.3.1 Code system. The codes established in this appendix are used in a position and
sequence system. Coded data used under this system shall appear in the sequence and the number
of positions specified in Appendix E. This system reduces the data to a convenient format capable
of being stored and manipulated by existing automated data processing methods and equipment or
by manual means.
J.3.2 Procedure and responsibilities for revisions. The procedure and responsibilities set
forth below provide a means for incorporating needed additional packaging requirements and
138
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
codes into the established tables of this appendix with a minimum of delay. This procedure
applies only to this appendix.
J.3.2.1 Adding codes. Military agencies requiring the addition of a requirement to the
tables herein shall request the preparing activity to establish a code for the requirement and
publish it in the next regular revision. Requests for additions to the code tables shall include a
justification of use (number of acquisitions per year) and approximate number of items to which
the requirement will apply. Due to the limitations of the code system, new codes will not be
established unless a substantial need is indicated. Copies of all correspondence relative to any
code shall be furnished to the departmental custodians concerned. See Appendix E for use of
supplemental data as a means of establishing requirements in lieu of codes.
J.4 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS
J.4.1 General code requirements. The requirements cited in the tables of this appendix
will be defined by use of the codes associated therewith. When using these codes, a symbol must
be used in each digit position in every field of the total code. To distinguish between alphabetical
and numerical "0" and "00", the numeric characters shall be designated as "0/" and
"0/0/" and the alphabetic characters as "O" and "OO". When none of the requirements of the table
apply, one of the following codes shall be used:
a.
Use the numerical code "0/" or "0/0/" (depending on the number of digit spaces in the
code field) to indicate that the field does not apply to the package described by the
code.
b.
Use of code "X" or "XX" (depending on the number of digit spaces in the code
field) indicates that the requirement is contained within the method of preservation.
c.
Use the code "Z" or "ZZ" (depending on the number of digit spaces in the code
field) to indicate that supplementary or special requirements apply which are not
represented by the code symbols. When either of these symbols are used in an
acquisition document, details of the requirement shall be provided with the
document.
J.4.2 Preservation methods. Table J.I lists method of preservation codes as established by
and described in 5.2.3.
139
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
J.4.2.1 Specialized preservation. Table J.Ia lists codes for packaging procedures which are
regularly used but which cannot be conveniently or adequately described without amplification of
the basic method and material symbols.
J.4.3 Quantity per unit pack. The quantity per unit pack codes shall be as follows:
Code
In clear
BLK
ZZZ
Quantity
0/0/1 through 999
Bulk
Special requirements refer to supplemental data, special instructions or
drawings provided.
J.4.4 Cleaning. Table J.II lists cleaning requirement codes in alphanumerical order.
J.4.5 Preservative. Table J.III lists contact preservative material codes in alphanumerical
order. Table J.IIIa lists those codes that directly reference a single specification in specification
number sequence.
J.4.6 Wrapping material. Table J.IV lists wrapping material codes in alphanumerical
order. Table J.IVa lists those codes that directly reference a single specification in specification
number sequence.
J.4.7 Cushioning and dunnage. Table J.V lists cushioning and dunnage material codes in
alphanumerical order. Table J.Va lists those codes that directly reference a single specification in
specification number sequence.
J.4.8 Thickness of cushioning or dunnage. Table J.VI defines thickness of specified
cushioning material.
J.4.9 Unit and intermediate container. Table J.VII lists the unit and intermediate
container codes in alphanumerical order. Table J.VIIa lists those codes that directly reference a
single specification in specification number sequence.
J.4.9.1 Options. When the selected code allows an option in the selection of the
container, the weight and size limitations of the container specification will apply.
J.4.10 Unit container level and optional procedure indicator codes. Table J.VIII lists unit
container level codes and table J.VIIIa lists optional procedure indicator codes.
140
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
J.4.11 Unit packs per intermediate container. The quantity of unit packs per intermediate
container codes shall be as follows:
Code
In clear
AAA
XXX
ZZZ
Quantity
0/0/0/ through 10/0/
See B.5
See Method of Preservation
Special requirement see specific drawing or instruction provided
J.4.12 Intermediate container. The codes for the intermediate containers are the same as
the codes used to specify the unit containers and are listed in table J.VII.
J.4.12.1 Intermediate container limitations. Refer to B.5.2.
J.4.13 Packing. The codes that indicate the type of shipping container for military
packing are listed in table J.IX. Codes for minimal packing are listed in table J.IXa.
J.4.14 Special markings. Table J.X lists the codes for special markings. The special
markings are considered an integral part of the total pack required to identify and to protect the
contained item during packaging, storage, transit and removal from the pack and must be applied
to the containers according to MIL-STD-129. The codes should be used only as they apply to
items enclosed within the approved packaging and shall be compatible with the prescribed
packaging data.
J.5 CROSS INDEX
J.5.1 Document number to table and code. A cross index that relates each document
listed in Appendix J to the specific table that references the document, and its corresponding code,
may be found in table J.XI.
141
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.I. Methods of preservation codes (see J.4.2).
Code
10/
Physical protection
20/
Preservative coating only

(with greaseproof wrap,
as required)
30 Waterproof protection
Waterproof bag, sealed
Container, waterproof bag,
sealed
Greaseproof-waterproof bag,
sealed
40 Watervaporproof protection
Watervaporproof bag, sealed
Container, watervaporproof
bag, sealed, container
Floating watervaporproof bag,
sealed
Rigid container (other than
metal), sealed
Rigid metal container, sealed
50 Watervaporproof protection
with desiccant
Watervaporproof bag, sealed
Container, watervaporproof
bag, sealed, container
Floating watervaporproof
bag, sealed
Rigid container (other than
metal), sealed
Rigid metal container, sealed
See J.4.1.c
31
32
33
41
42
43
44
45
51
52
53
54
55
ZZ
Superseded codes from:
Method
142
MIL-P-116J
III
MIL-STD-2073-2C
10/
11
IC
IC-3
IC-2
2Y
2D
2M
IC-1
2E
IA
IA-8
IA-14
3Y
3G
3Q
IA-16
3H
IA-13
3T
IA-5
II
3V
4Y
IIc
IIb
4G
4Q
IIa
4H
IIf
4T
IId
-
4V
-
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.Ia. Specialized preservation codes (see J.4.2.1).
Code
AE
Packaging procedure
Seal or plug all openings with approved noncorrosive materials to prevent
entrance of moisture, dirt and foreign matter. Package to meet requirements of
Method 10.
AH
Preserve Method 20 as follows: Fog spray or flush internally with preservative

indicated by preservation code. All openings shall then be plugged or sealed to
prevent entrance of dirt and moisture. Exterior unpainted ferrous metal surfaces
shall be coated with a suitable paint or enamel, or coated with cold application,
nontacky, corrosion preventive compound conforming to MIL-PRF-16173, Grade
4.
AU
Preservative compounds shall not be applied to windings, commutators or

peripheries of armatures or rotors. Shafts shall be coated with MIL-PRF-16173,
Grade 2 preservative and wrapped with MIL-B-121, Grade A material, secured in
place with ASTM-D5486 tape. Commutators shall be wrapped with MIL-B-121,
Grade A material, held in place with ASTM-D5486 tape. Exposed surfaces of
steel collector rings shall be coated with MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 2 preservative.
No preservative is required for bronze, brass or corrosion resisting metals. All
collector rings shall be wrapped with MIL-B-121, Grade A material, secured in
place with ASTM-D5486 tape. Corrodible surfaces, except shafts, commutators,
and collector rings, may be preserved by the use of insulating varnish applied
during the manufacturing process. In addition to the foregoing requirements,
armatures and rotors shall be wrapped with MIL-B-121, Grade A material,
secured with ASTM-D5486 tape.
AW
Preserve in accordance with any of the following alternate methods (used for
gaskets and similar items):
a. Seal in bags conforming to Class B, C or E of MIL-B-117, using stiffening
material internally if needed to maintain rigidity.
b. Preservation method 42 or 44.
143
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.Ia. Specialized preservation codes (see J.4.2.1) - Continued.
Code
Packaging procedure
c. Place between sheet of, or in fold of, corrugated fiberboard of sufficient
stiffness to resist bending, overwrap with waterproof wrapping paper
conforming to PPP-B-1055 and seal with pressure sensitive tape conforming
to ASTM-D5486 or adhesive conforming to MMM-A-260. Authorization to
use other waterproof barrier materials may be granted upon request.
BC
Preserve by Method 20 as follows: Coat all pieces of set with preservative

compound conforming to MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 4. Wrap or bag each preserved
piece individually in MIL-B-121, Grade A material. Cushion or segregate
individually wrapped or bagged pieces in the storage container to prevent
movement and possible physical damage. (Segregated identical pieces, such as
buckets and seal strips, are to be kept as close together in the container as possible
to facilitate ease of counting.) Individually preserved, wrapped or bagged pieces
need not be identified since container markings are in accordance with MIL-STD129. Itemized packing lists for inclusion within or attachment to the outside of the
container shall be furnished in accordance with MIL-STD-129. The lists shall
show quantity and nomenclature of all items included in the set. (Used for turbine
blade sets and similar items.)
BD
Remove parts made of rubber, fiber, or nonmetallic materials adversely affected by

preservative compounds and package by Method 41 without a preservative.
Preserve metal parts of assembly to conform to the requirements of Method 40.
Mark the bag containing nonmetallic parts "Parts for Assembly" and include it
within, or securely attached to, the pack containing metal parts in a manner which
will assure its being found when the pack is opened. (Use for couplings and
similar items.)
BL
Plug or seal all openings and preserve Method 20.
DB
Preserve by Method 10 modified as follows: Preserve in transparent barrier bag

made of A-A-3174 or Type III MIL-PRF-22191 material. A-A-3174 or MILPRF-22191, Type III material, A-A-3129 or PPP-C-795 cushioning shall be used
to cushion sharp edges and protrusions of the preserved items. Bag closure shall
be made by any suitable means, except that staples shall not be used. When use of
a bag is not practicable, the item shall be completely wrapped in the above
144
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Code
Packaging procedure
barrier or cushioning material and secured with pressure sensitive tape. Also, the
use of shaped or molded packs utilizing MIL-PRF-22191 or A-A-3174 materials
in conjunction with plastic coated board is acceptable provided the pack's cube is
not increased and the pack meets the tests specified in Appendix G. Strip or block
form of multiple packages shall incorporate provisions for separating unit
quantities.
DC
Preserve by Method 20 modified as follows: Preserve in a transparent barrier

wrap made of Type II, MIL-PRF-22191 barrier material, or bag conforming to
Type I, Class C, Style 2 of MIL-B-117. MIL-PRF-22191, Type II barrier material
shall be used to cushion sharp edges and protrusions of item to prevent bag
puncture. A-A-3129 or PPP-C-795 may also be used to cushion sharp edges and
protrusions if item is first wrapped in MIL-PRF-22191, Type II barrier material.
The bag closure shall be made by any suitable means, except that staples shall not
be used. Also, the use of shaped, preformed or molded packages utilizing MILPRF-22191 or A-A-3174 materials in conjunction with plastic coated board is
acceptable, provided that the package cube is not increased and materials are
compatible with preservative specified. However, these packages shall be capable
of meeting the tests specified in Appendix G. Strip or block form of multiple
packages shall incorporate provisions for separating unit quantities.
DR
Preserve Method 30 as follows: Each unit shall have all internal fluid-carrying
passages, which are not prelubricated, filled with the specified preservative,
allowing space for internal thermal expansion. If filling is not practical, the unit
shall be internally fog-sprayed or flushed, then drained to the drip point. All ports,
fittings, openings, etc., shall be capped or plugged with noncorrosive (noninteracting) metal caps or plugs conforming to NAS 847 or equivalent. All
hydraulic preservative operating fluid used shall be filtered through a 3 micron
absolute filter prior to being used as specified above. Exterior bare metal surfaces,
subject to corrosion, shall be coated with compound conforming to MIL-PRF16173, Grade 2 or MIL-C-11796, Class 3. Unit shall be wrapped with a
145
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Code
Packaging procedure
greaseproof wrap conforming to MIL-B-121, Grade A or equivalent; seal seams
with ASTM-D5486 tape to effect a measure of waterproofness and prevent
unwrapping. The unit must be adequately cushioned with material specified and
placed in a grade V3c container fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118 (as a
minimum), Style FOL or CSSC. All seams, corners, and manufacturer's joint shall
be tape-sealed with two inch tape conforming to ASTM-D5486, Type III or IV.
DW
Preserve Method 52 as follows: Item shall be cleaned, wrapped, blocked and

braced in an interior carton fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118, Class
domestic. MIL-PRF-131 barrier material, sealed as required, shall be utilized
around the first container. The cushioning, to be specified under the cushioning
code and in the thickness required to adequately protect the item, shall be placed
between the barrier and the outer container.
EK
Preserve Method 10 as follows: Each bolt shall have the shank and threads
protected by means of a sleeve extending over the full length of the shank and
thread. The sleeve shall be manufactured from paperboard, asphalt impregnated
chipboard, or spiral wrap of kraft paper over chipboard, lined with material
conforming to MIL-B-121. Plastic sleeve coverings may also be used.
GS
Preserve by Method 33 (modified) in a transparent, flexible, sealable, volatile

corrosion inhibitor treated bag conforming to MIL-B-22020. The interleaf
furnished inside each Class 2, cold sealable bag shall be withdrawn after inserting
item and prior to final sealing in accordance with MIL-B-22020. Items with sharp
edges or protrusions shall be wrapped with sufficient layers of transparent, flexible,
pressure (cold) sealable volatile corrosion inhibitor barrier material conforming to
MIL-PRF-22019, Type II to prevent bag puncture. The latex coated (nonprinted)
side of the barrier material shall always be facing the item. Alternately, the item
may be completely wrapped with transparent, flexible, pressure (cold) sealable
volatile corrosion inhibitor barrier material conforming
to MIL-PRF-22019, Type II as indicated above and further preserved in a
transparent barrier bag conforming to Type I, Class C, Style 2 of MIL-B-117.
Closure shall be by heat-sealing when this alternate method is used. In addition
to markings required elsewhere in the contract, unit identification and caution
labels shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-129.
146
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Code
GX
Packaging procedure
Preserve by Method 41 as follows: Items subject to damage by electromagnetic
and electrostatic field forces shall be initially wrapped in material conforming to
MIL-PRF-81705, Type II or Type III, or cushioned in material conforming to AA-3129, Type I, Grade B, or PPP-C-795, Class 2 or A-A-59135, Class 1, Grade
B, or PPP-C-1797, Type II, to prevent bag puncture, and unit packed in a heatsealed bag conforming to MIL-B-117, Type I, Class F, Style 1. Reclosable
cushioned pouches conforming to MIL-P-81997, Type I or II, may be used in lieu
of initial wrap or cushioning. Lead or terminal configurations for all items shall be
maintained as manufactured without causing loads or stresses capable of causing
damage to the item. Materials used to maintain item position and lead or terminal
configuration shall permit item removal without damage to the item. Electrostatic
discharge (ESD) sensitive caution labels shall be applied in accordance with MILSTD-129.
HM
Packaging and marking for hazardous materials shall comply with applicable
requirements for Performance Oriented Packaging contained in the International
Air Transport Association (IATA) Dangerous Goods Regulations or the
International Maritime Dangerous Goods Code (IMDG) and with Code of Federal
Regulations (CFR) Title 29, Title 40 and Title 49. All performance test
requirements shall be supported by certificates and reports attesting to the date
and the results obtained from performance oriented packaging testing. The
contractor, if not a self-certifier, shall be responsible for assuring that third party
sources providing performance testing services are, in fact, registered with the
Department of Transportation. The contractor's signed certification that the
packaged configuration meets IATA or IMDG requirements shall be incorporated
on the DD Form 250, Material Inspection and Receiving Report, and other related
acceptance document if the DD Form 250 is not used. All certificates and reports
shall be available for inspection by authorized Government representatives for a
period of three years.
JF
Preserve Method 10 Items shall be preserved in a vacuum formed skin pack,

formed from either cellulose acetate, cellulose butyrate or cellulose propionate.
The material shall be 10 to 15 mils minimum thickness prior to draw and 2 to 4
mils thickness after draw. Class domestic fiberboard meeting the requirements of
ASTM-D4727 shall be used as a stiffener.
147
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Code
JM
Packaging procedure
Preserve Method 10 as follows: Unit container shall consist of one piece of 3/8inch plywood and one piece of double wall fiberboard meeting the requirements of
ASTM-D4727, each 4 inches longer and wider than the item dimensions. Place
item on plywood, cover with fiberboard and staple fiberboard to plywood on sides
and end. For items longer than 96 inches, frame panel in accordance with PPP-B601 (used for backing boards and similar flat items.)
KD
Preserve Method 31. Apply VV-L-800 preservative. Place item in a bag

conforming to MIL-B-22020 and place bagged item into a weather resistant
fiberboard box fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118. Fill voids with
fiberboard meeting the requirements of ASTM-D4727 or A-A-1898, Grade II
material as required.
KF
Clean each item in accordance with any applicable process. Use non-corrosive
material to plug any crevices, holes or cavities. Preserve by directly applying
strippable, plastic coating compound (hot dipping) conforming to MIL-P-149 or
equivalent to the clean dry metal surface of the item. Apply the compound in such
a way that upon removal, no compound will be retained in the voids. The
compound shall be a Type II, transparent, cellulose acetate butyrate variety.
Apply as many layers of the plastic coating compound as necessary to protect the
item from contact damage and to seal it from moisture. Wrap the individually
coated items in MIL-B-121 greaseproof, waterproof, barrier material. (Use on
labyrinth rings and similar items in sets.)
KG
Each fully buttoned shirt shall be neatly folded, secured with stainless steel (AISI
Type 304 or 316) pins, aluminum clips or plastic fasteners, and inserted into a
snug-fitting, clear plastic bag. The bag shall be closed by heat sealing, taping
(provided the back panel overlaps the front panel), or by a bag designed to effect a
reverse tuck closure.
KH
Each pair of shoes or boots shall be individually wrapped prior to being placed in a
shoe box. Each pair of individually wrapped shoes or boots shall be packaged in a
set-up style shoe box or a mailer type box.
148
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.II. Cleaning procedure codes (see J.4.4).
Code
1
X
Z
0/
Procedure
Any suitable process that is not injurious to the item.
See Method of Preservation code for this requirement.
Special requirements - See specific instructions or drawings provided.
No requirement.
149
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.III. Contact preservative material codes (see J.4.5).
Code
0/1
0/2
0/3
0/6
0/7
0/9
10/
11
12
13
15
17
19
20/
21
27
28
29
30/
31
32
33
38
43
49
50/
51
Material
MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 1, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, cold application,
hard film
soft film
water displacing soft film
MIL-C-11796, Class 3, light preservative compound, soft film, hot application
MIL-PRF-3150, medium preservative oil, cold application
VV-L-800, very light preservative oil, water displacing, cold application
MIL-PRF-21260, preservative and break-in lubricating oil, internal combustion
engine, Grade 10, 30 or 50
MIL-PRF-23827, grease, aircraft and instrument, gear and actuator screw
MIL-PRF-81322, grease, aircraft, general purpose
MIL-PRF-10924, grease, automotive and artillery
MIL-H-46170, hydraulic fluid, synthetic, rust inhibited, fire resistant
MIL-PRF-6085, lubricating oil, instrument, aircraft, low volatility
transparent, non-tacky
MIL-P-46002, preservative oil, contact and volatile corrosion inhibited
MIL-PRF-16173, Grade 5, corrosion preventive, solvent cutback, water displacing
soft film, low pressure steam removable
MIL-C-16555, Type I, sprayable strippable coating, aluminum and aluminum gray
MIL-C-16555, Type II, Class 1, sprayable strippable coating, olive drab
MIL-C-16555, Type II, Class 2, sprayable strippable coating, Marine Corps green
MIL-L-46010, corrosion inhibiting lubricant, solid film, heat cured
MIL-C-6529, Type II, corrosion preventive, ready mixed, for reciprocating aircraft
engines
MIL-C-6529, Type III, corrosion preventive, ready mixed, for turbojet aircraft
engines
MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil, synthetic base, for aircraft turbine engines
MIL-P-149, strippable plastic coating (hot dipping)
MIL-G-25537, grease, helicopter oscillating bearing
Vendor's protective grease or oil coating
MIL-PRF-7870, lubricating oil, low temperature
MIL-PRF-6081, lubricating oil, jet engine, Grade 1010
150
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.III. Contact preservative material codes (see J.4.5) Continued.
Code
52
53
56
57
58
59
65
79
80/
89
XX
ZZ
0/0/
Material
MIL-PRF-8188, corrosion preventive oil, synthetic base, for aircraft gas turbine
engines
SAE-J1966, lubricating oil, aircraft piston engine
MIL-PRF-23699, lubricating oil, synthetic base, for aircraft turbine engines
MIL-PRF-21260, Grade 10, light viscosity preservative and break-in lubricating oil,
internal combustion engine
MIL-PRF-21260, Grade 2, medium viscosity preservative and break-in lubricating oil,
MIL-PRF-21260, Grade 3, heavy viscosity preservative and break-in lubricating oil,
MIL-PRF-83282, hydraulic fluid, synthetic, fire retardant
MIL-B-46176, brake fluid, silicone, automotive, operational and preservative
MIL-P-53030, primer coating, epoxy, water reducible
Preserve with normal operating lubricant
See Method of Preservation code for this requirement
Special requirement See specific instructions or drawings provided
No requirement
151
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.IIIa. Contact preservative material codes in
specification sequence (see J.4.5).
Specification
VV-L-800, very light preservative oil, water displacing (cold application).
MIL-P-149, strippable plastic coating (hot dipping).
MIL-PRF-3150, medium preservative oil, cold application.
MIL-PRF-6081, lubricating oil, jet engine, Grade 1010.
MIL-PRF-6085, lubricating oil, instrument, aircraft, low volatility.
MIL-C-6529, Type II, corrosion preventive, ready-mixed, for reciprocating aircraft
engines.
MIL-C-6529, Type III, corrosion preventive, ready-mixed, for turbo-jet aircraft
engines.
MIL-PRF-7808, lubricating oil, synthetic base, for aircraft turbine engines.
MIL-PRF-7870, lubricating oil, low temperature.
MIL-PRF-8188, corrosion preventive oil, synthetic base, for aircraft gas turbine
engines.
MIL-PRF-10924, grease, automotive and artillery.
MIL-C-11796, Class 3, light preservative, soft film, hot application.
hard film.
soft film.
water displacing soft film.
transparent, non-tacky.
water displacing soft film, low pressure steam removable.
MIL-C-16555, Type I, sprayable, strippable coating, aluminum and aluminum gray.
MIL-C-16555, Type II, Class 1, sprayable, strippable coating, olive drab.
MIL-C-16555, Type II, Class 2, sprayable, strippable coating, Marine Corps green.
MIL-PRF-21260, preservative and break-in lubricating oil, internal combustion
engine, Grade 10, 30 or 50.
MIL-PRF-21260, Grade 2, medium viscosity preservative and break-in lubricating oil,
internal combustion engine.
MIL-PRF-21260, Grade 3, heavy viscosity preservative and break-in lubricating oil,
152
Code
0/9
38
0/7
51
17
31
32
33
50/
52
13
0/6
0/1
0/2
0/3
19
21
27
28
29
10/
58
59
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.IIIa. Contact preservative material codes in
specification sequence (see J.4.5) - Continued
Specification
MIL-PRF-21260, Grade 10, light viscosity preservative and break-in lubricating oil,
MIL-PRF-23699, lubricating oil, synthetic base, for aircraft turbine engines.
MIL-PRF-23827, grease, aircraft and instrument.
MIL-G-25537, grease, helicopter oscillating bearing.
MIL-P-46002, preservative, volatile corrosion inhibited.
MIL-L-46010, corrosion inhibiting lubricant, solid film, heat cured.
MIL-H-46170, hydraulic fluid, synthetic, rust inhibited, fire resistant.
MIL-B-46176, brake fluid, silicone, automotive, operational and preservative.
MIL-P-53030, primer coating, epoxy, water reducible.
MIL-PRF-81322, grease, general purpose, aircraft.
MIL-PRF-83282, hydraulic fluid, synthetic, fire retardant.
SAE-J1966, lubricating oil, aircraft piston engine.
153
Code
57
56
11
43
20/
30/
15
79
80/
12
65
53
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.IV. Wrapping material codes (see J.4.6).
Code
BA
CA
DA
EA
EB
EC
FA
GB
GC
GH
JA
JL
JV
K3
LA
MB
N9
XX
ZZ
0/0/
Material
QQ-A-1876, aluminum foil
A-A-203, kraft wrapping paper
A-A-1249, paper, tissue
MIL-P-17667, neutral wrapping paper
MIL-P-17667, Type I, neutral wrapping paper, flat
MIL-P-17667, Type II, neutral wrapping paper, creped
MIL-P-130, laminated and creped wrapping paper
MIL-B-121, Grade A, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
MIL-B-121, Grade A, Type I, heavy duty, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
MIL-B-121, Grade A, Type II, medium duty, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
A-A-3174, plastic sheet, polyolefin, 2 mil
MIL-PRF-22019, transparent volatile corrosion inhibitor treated barrier material
MIL-PRF-22191, Type III, transparent waterproof barrier material
MIL-PRF-81705, Type II, transparent electrostatic protective barrier material
A-A-50177, lens paper
MIL-PRF-3420, volatile corrosion inhibitor treated material
MIL-PRF-81705, Type III, transparent, electrostatic protective, static shielding
barrier material
Special requirements see specific instructions or drawings provided
No requirement
154
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.IVa. Wrapping material codes in specification sequence (see J.4.6).
Specification
A-A-203, kraft wrapping paper
A-A-1249, tissue paper
A-A-3174, plastic sheet, polyolefin, 2 mil
A-A-50177, lens paper
QQ-A-1876, aluminum foil
MIL-B-121, Grade A, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
MIL-B-121, Grade A, Type I, heavy duty, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
MIL-B-121, Grade A, Type II, medium duty, greaseproof, waterproof barrier
MIL-P-130, creped paper
MIL-PRF-3420, volatile corrosion inhibitor treated material
MIL-P-17667, neutral wrapping paper
MIL-P-17667, Type I, flat neutral wrapping paper
MIL-P-17667, Type II, creped neutral wrapping paper
MIL-PRF-22019, transparent VCI-treated barrier material
MIL-PRF-22191, Type III, transparent waterproof barrier material
MIL-PRF-81705, Type II, transparent electrostatic protective barrier
MIL-PRF-81705, Type III, class 1, transparent, electrostatic protective, static
shielding barrier material
155
Code
CA
DA
JA
LA
BA
GB
GC
GH
FA
MB
EA
EB
EC
JL
JV
K3
N9
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.V. Cushioning and dunnage material codes (see J.4.7).
Code
AD
BG
BN
DA
DH
FA
FE
FH
FL
GA
GC
GD
GE
GF
GH
GT
HA
HB
HD
JA
JB
JC
LC
LE
LK
Material
Cushion, anchor, block or brace in accordance with MIL-STD-1186
A-A-1898, Grade II, water resistant cellulosic cushioning
PPP-C-850, polystyrene cushioning
A-A-1051, paperboard cushioning
MIL-PRF-20092, latex foam rubber
PPP-C-1120, Class A, water resistant bound fiber
PPP-C-1120, Class A, Type II, medium soft density, water resistant bound fiber
PPP-C-1120, Class A, Type III, medium firm density, water resistant bound fiber
PPP-C-1120, Class A, Type IV, firm density, water resistant bound fiber
A-A-59136, polyethylene foam cushioning
MIL-P-19644, expanded polystyrene foam
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 1, rigid polyurethane foam
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade A, flexible polyurethane foam, light load
range
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade B, flexible polyurethane foam, medium
load range
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade C, flexible polyurethane foam, heavy
load range
PPP-C-1797, polypropylene foam cushioning
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet used as a stiffener on one side of item
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet used as a stiffener on both sides of item
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet used as pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves
Domestic fiberboard meeting the requirements of ASTM-D4727 used as a
stiffener on one side of item
Domestic fiberboard meeting the requirements of ASTM-D4727 used as a
stiffener on both sides of item
Domestic fiberboard meeting the requirements of ASTM-D4727 used as pads,
cells, die cuts or sleeves
PPP-C-795, Class 1, cellular plastic film cushioning
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, flexible polyurethane foam used as corner pads
Wood blocking and bracing, fasteners, or steel strapping, for tie-down purposes.
Rubber tired wheels shall be blocked clear of the floor of the crate or skid and
shall not be load bearing.
156
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.V. Cushioning and dunnage material codes (see J.4.7) - Continued
Code
LN
LP
LT
MA
MB
MD
NA
NB
NG
NS
P4
XX
ZZ
0/0/
Material
Plastic containers (vials, boxes, etc.) shall be constructed of rigid, transparent
material that, if applicable, is resistant to any lubricant or preservative being
used
A-A-55057, plywood, padded as required
PPP-C-795, Class 2, antistataic cellular plastic film cushioning
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 2, Grade A, flexible foam-in-place polyurethane
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 1, rigid foam-in-place polyurethane
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 2, Grade B, flexible foam-in-place polyurethane
PPP-C-795, cellular plastic film cushioning; or A-A-3129, open cell plastic
cushioning; or PPP-C-1797, polypropylene foam cushioning; or A-A-59136,
polyethylene foam cushioning
A-A-3129, Type I, Grade B, anti-static open cell plastic cushioning; or PPP-C1797, Type II, polypropylene foam cushioning. Other electrostatic free
cushioning is acceptable provided it meets the static decay rate test requirement
of A-A-3129.
A-A-3129, open cell plastic cushioning
Weather resistant fiberboard meeting the requirements of ASTM-D4727 used as
pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves; or plastic molding material conforming to MILP-19644; or polyurethane foam conforming to MIL-PRF-26514
MIL-P-81997, cushioned pouch, electrostatic protective, transparent
Special requirements. See specific instructions or drawings provided.
No requirement
157
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.Va. Cushioning and dunnage material codes in
specification sequence (see J.4.7).
Specification
A-A-1051, paperboard cushioning
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet as a stiffener on one side of the item
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet as a stiffener on both sides of item
A-A-1507, chipboard sheet used as pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves
A-A-1898, Grade II, water resistant cellulosic cushioning
A-A-3129, open cell plastic cushioning
A-A-55057, plywood, padded as required
A-A-59136, polyethylene foam cushioning
PPP-C-795, Class 1, cellular plastic film cushioning
PPP-C-795, Class 2, anti-static cellular plastic film cushioning
PPP-C-850, polystyrene cushioning
PPP-C-1120, Class A, water resistant bound fiber
PPP-C-1120, Class A, Type II, medium soft density, water resistant bound fiber
PPP-C-1120, Class A, Type III, medium firm density, water resistant bound fiber
PPP-C-1120, Class A, Type IV, firm density, water resistant bound fiber
PPP-C-1797, polypropylene foam cushioning
PPP-P-19644, expanded polystyrene foam
MIL-PRF-20092, latex foam rubber
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 1, rigid polyurethane foam
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade A, flexible polyurethane foam, light load
range
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade B, flexible polyurethane foam, medium
load range
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, Grade C, flexible polyurethane foam, heavy load
range
MIL-PRF-26514, Type I, Class 2, flexible polyurethane foam used as corner pads
MIL-P-81997, cushioned pouch, electrostatic protective, transparent
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 1, rigid foam-in-place polyurethane
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 2, Grade A, flexible foam-in-place polyurethane
MIL-PRF-83671, Class 2, Grade B, flexible foam-in-place polyurethane
ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard as a stiffener on one side of item
ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard as a stiffener on both sides of item
ASTM-D4727, domestic fiberboard used as pads, cells, die cuts or sleeves
158
Code
DA
HA
HB
HD
BG
NG
LP
GA
LC
LT
BN
FA
FE
FH
FL
GT
GC
DH
GD
GE
GF
GH
LE
P4
MB
MA
MD
JA
JB
JC
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.VI. Thickness of cushioning or dunnage codes (see J.4.8).
Code
0/
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
J
K
L
M
Minimum Thickness
Not applicable
1/4 inch thick
1/2 inch thick
3/4 inch thick
1 inch thick
1-1/4 inches thick
1-1/2 inches thick
1-3/4 inches thick
2 inches thick
2-1/4 inches thick
2-1/2 inches thick
2-3/4 inches thick
3 inches thick
Code
N
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Z
159
Minimum Thickness
3-1/4 inches thick
3-1/2 inches thick
3-3/4 inches thick
4 inches thick
4-1/4 inches thick
4-1/2 inches thick
4-3/4 inches thick
5 inches thick
5-1/4 inches thick
As required to protect the item or
elements of the package
Special requirements See specific
instructions or drawings provided
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.VII. Unit and intermediate container codes (see J.4.9 or J.4.12).
Code
10/
A1
A2
AA
AC
AH
AN
B1
B2
B3
B8
B9
BD
BE
BL
BS
BT
BV
CG
CH
D1
Container
Any suitable container included in this table may be used (see J.4.9.1).
Bags made of material conforming to MIL-P-130, MIL-P-17667, MIL-B-121 Grade
A, or any material authorized by MIL-B-117. Closure may be by staples, tape,
adhesive or heat seal.
Any bag or sack used by the vendor.
A-A-2714, mailing bags, cloth.
A-A-160 or A-A-1588, sacks, shipping, paper (cushioned).
A-A-881, bags, textile, shipping.
A-A-550, bags, paper, grocers.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class B, Style 3, heavy duty, waterproof, one side opaque and
other side transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class C, Style 3, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof, one side
opaque and other side transparent bag
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class E, Style 3, heavy duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof, one
side opaque and other side transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class A, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, electrostatic
protective, transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class F, Style 1, heavy duty, watervaporproof, electrostatic
protective, opaque bag.
MIL-B-117, bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class C, Style 1, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof, opaque
bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class B, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class E, Style 1, heavy duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof,
opaque bag.
MIL-B-22020, bag, transparent, heat sealable, VCI treated.
MIL-B-117, Type II, Class C, Style 1, medium duty, waterproof, greaseproof, opaque
bag.
PPP-D-723, Type I, domestic type fiber drum.
PPP-D-723, Type II, normal overseas type fiber drum.
PPP-B-566 or PPP-B-676, folding or setup box.
160
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.VII. Unit and intermediate container codes (see J.4.9 or J.4.12) - Continued.
Code
D2
D3
D4
DA
DE
DJ
DO
DP
DQ
DR
E5
E6
E7
E8
E9
EC
ED
EE
EN
EP
EZ
F2
F3
F5
F6
Container
PPP-B-566, A-A-2807, or PPP-B-676, folding, metal-edged or setup box.
PPP-B-566, A-A-2807, PPP-B-676, or ASTM-D5118, folding, metal edged, setup or
fiberboard box.
Vendor's setup or folding box.
PPP-B-566, folding paperboard box.
PPP-B-676, setup box.
A-A-2807, metal-edged paperboard box.
Any suitable fiber box included in this table may be used (see 5.9.1).
ASTM-D5168, box, triple wall, fiberboard.
ASTM-D5168, Class 1, non-weather resistant triple wall fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5168, Class 2, weather resistant triple wall fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, fiberboard box.
Vendor's fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, single wall, corrugated fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, double wall, corrugated fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Class weather resistant fiberboard box; or PPP-B-566, water resistant
folding box; or PPP-B-676, water resistant setup box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, corrugated fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, corrugated fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, single wall, corrugated fiberboard
box.
ASTM-D5118, Type SF, Class domestic, solid fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type SF, Class weather resistant, solid fiberboard box.
PPP-B-601, cleated plywood box, domestic or overseas, demountable, assembled
with fasteners other than nails and screws. Inspection door for reading humidity
indicator provided for Method 50 packages. Top, one side and one end will be
marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER AND CUSHIONING USE FOR RETURN
OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" in black letters a minimum 2" high.
PPP-B-601, overseas cleated plywood box or PPP-B-621, Class 2, overseas nailed
wood box.
PPP-B-601, domestic cleated plywood box or PPP-B-621, Class 1, domestic nailed
wood box.
Vendor's wood box.
PPP-B-601, Style I or J, cleated plywood box, surface treated in accordance with the
requirements of the specification.
161
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Code
F7
F9
FA
FB
FC
FD
FF
FG
FJ
FK
FL
FM
FO
FU
FV
Container
PPP-B-601 or PPP-B-621, overseas or domestic type, determined by shipment
destination. Provided with nominal 2" x 4" skid. Box provided with an inspection
door, located for clear reading of the humidity indicator, for Method 54 only.
Inspection door shall be hinged, cleated or sealed (similar to inspection door
specified in MIL-C-104). Wood and plywood boxes shall have top panels secured
with wood screws and boxes banded. The top, one side, and one end of the box
shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER AND CUSHIONING USE FOR
RETURN OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" with black letters, minimum 2" high. In
addition, mark box "TO OPEN USE SCREWDRIVER" with one inch minimum
high letters. Letter sizes may be appropriately reduced in proportion to size of
container.
Shallow box, constructed of plywood and wood as follows: Sides and ends of one
piece of lumber, 3/4 inch minimum thickness. Top and bottom of one piece
standard grade 3/8 inch plywood with exterior weather-resistant glue. End cleats
shall run across the grain of the ends and shall extend within 1/8 inch of the outside
surface of the top and bottom. Sides shall extend over the cleats. Battens shall be
applied in accordance with 3.3.5, 3.3.5.2, 3.3.5.2.1 and 3.3.5.2.2, and table VIII of
PPP-B-621 except exterior battens or cleats shall not be used on the top. Nailing
pattern and size of nails used in fastening the top and bottom to the sides and ends
shall conform to table XI of PPP-B-621 for the Style 4 box.
PPP-B-621, nailed wood box.
PPP-B-621, Class 1, domestic nailed wood box.
PPP-B-621, Class 2, overseas nailed wood box.
PPP-B-601, cleated plywood box.
PPP-B-601, overseas type, cleated plywood box.
PPP-B-601, domestic type, cleated plywood box.
with fasteners other than nails or screws.
ASTM-D6251, wood-cleated panelboard box.
ASTM-D6251, Class 1, domestic, wood-cleated panelboard box.
ASTM-D6251, Class 2, overseas wood-cleated panelboard box.
Any suitable wood box included in this table may be used (see 5.9.1).
MIL-B-26195, wood-cleated skidded box, load bearing base.
MIL-B-26195, Type I, domestic, wood-cleated skidded box.
162
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Code
FW
GB
HA
K1
KE
KF
MA
MB
MC
MF
MG
MH
MJ
MO
MV
MX
MY
NO
NR
NS
NV
NW
NY
Container
MIL-B-26195, Type II, overseas, wood-cleated skidded box.
MIL-B-26195, Type I or II, Style A or B, Class 1 or 2. Provide box with inspection
door located for clear reading of the humidity indicator for Method 54 packages
only. The inspection door shall be hinged, cleated and sealed (similar to inspection
door specified by MIL-C-104). The top, one side and one end of the shipping
container shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER USE FOR RETURN OF
NRFI ASSEMBLY" in black letters, minimum 2" high.
PPP-B-96, metal can.
MIL-D-6054 or MIL-D-6055, metal reusable drum, depending upon size or capacity
limits of container.
MIL-D-6054, reusable metal drum.
MIL-D-6055, reusable metal drum (capacity from 88 to 510 cu. in.).
MIL-C-104, wood crate, lumber or plywood sheathed, nailed or bolted.
MIL-C-104, Type I, Class 1, nailed wood crate, lumber sheathed.
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 1, bolted wood crate, lumber sheathed.
MIL-C-104, Type I, Class 2, nailed wood crate, plywood sheathed.
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 2, bolted wood crate, plywood sheathed.
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 1 or 2, bolted wood crate, provided with lifting
attachments and an inspection port (Method 54 packages only). The top, one side
and one end of the crate shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER USE FOR
RETURN OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" with black letters a minimum of two inches
high.
MIL-C-3774, open wood crate.
Any suitable wood crate included in this table may be used (see 5.9.1).
ASTM-D6039, open or covered wood crate.
ASTM-D6039, Style B, open or covered wood crate, light duty.
NAVICP Drawing No. 15024, for shipping and storage of gyroscopic instruments.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, double wall, corrugated fiberboard
box.
PPP-B-1672, Type I, vertical star cushioning in reusable box.
PPP-B-1672, Type II, folding convoluted cushioning in reusable box.
PPP-B-1672, Type III, telescoping encapsulated cushioning in reusable box.
PPP-B-1672, Type IV, horizontal star cushioning in reusable box.
NAVICP Drawing No. P069, molded reusable container for circuit cards and
modules.
163
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Code
NZ
PK
RC
RD
RE
RF
RG
RH
RJ
RK
SD
SE
SF
SG
Container
NAVICP Drawing No. 13414, modular reusable container for packaging major
repairables.
PPP-B-601, overseas type, cleated plywood box; PPP-B-621, Class 2, overseas type
nailed wood box; or ASTM-D5168, Class 2, weather resistant triple wall fiberboard
box. Provide with nominal 2" by 4" skids. See box specifications for weight
limitations. The packaged item shall be centered and cushioned on all surfaces
between the unit package and shipping container with cushioning conforming to
PPP-C-1120, Type III or IV, Class C; A-A-59136; PPP-C-850, Type I; MIL-PRF26514 or MIL-R-20092, Type II, Class 4 as required. Close, seal and reinforce
fiberboard boxes in accordance with the appendix to the box specification. Steel
banding is not permitted for fiberboard boxes. Wood and plywood boxes shall have
top panels secured with wood screws and boxes banded. The top, one side and one
end of the shipping container shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER AND
CUSHIONING USE FOR RETURN OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" in black letters,
minimum 2" high. In addition, mark box "TO OPEN USE SCREWDRIVER" in
black letters, minimum 1" high. Letter sizes may be appropriately reduced in
proportion to size of container.
NAVICP Drawing No. 15450, modular reusable container for packaging depot level
repairables.
PPP-B-585, Class 2, wirebound wood box.
PPP-B-26, bag, plastic.
PPP-D-729, drum, steel, 55 gal.
MIL-B-2427, ammunition box, nailed wood.
MIL-B-46506, ammunition box, wirebound wood.
MIL-PRF-11264, reusable wood containers, heavy duty.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class C, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof,
transparent bag.
transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type III, Class E, Style 1, light duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof,
opaque bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class H, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, electrostatic
protective, electrostatic shielding.
164
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Code
WD
WM
WY
XX
ZZ
0/0/
Container
Plastic containers constructed of rigid transparent material that, if applicable, is
resistant to lubricant or preservative being used. Containers too small for adequate
marking shall be overpackaged in envelopes for identification marking purposes.
PPP-T-495, mailing tube.
Warner-Robins Air Logistics Center Drawing Nos. 11214-5002-100, 11214-5002200, 11214-5002-300, or 11214-50020-400 for shipping and storage of avionics
instruments.
See Method of Preservation code for this requirement.
Special requirement See specific instructions or drawings provided.
No requirement.
165
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.VIIa. Unit and intermediate container codes in specification
sequence (see J.4.9 and J.4.12).
Specification
A-A-160, sack, paper (cushioned).
A-A-550, bags, paper, grocers.
A-A-881, burlap shipping bag.
A-A-1588, sack, paper (cushioned).
A-A-2714, mailing bag, cloth.
A-A-2807, metal edged paperboard box
PPP-B-26, bag, plastic.
PPP-B-566, folding paperboard box.
PPP-B-601, cleated plywood box.
PPP-B-601, cleated plywood box, domestic.
PPP-B-601, cleated plywood box, overseas
PPP-B-601, Style I or J, cleated plywood box, surface treated in accordance with
the requirements of the specification.
with fasteners other than nails and screws.
with fasteners other than nails or screws. Inspection door for reading humidity
indicator provided for Method 50 packages. Top, one side and one end will be
marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER AND CUSHIONING USE FOR
RETURN OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" in black letters, minimum 2" high.
PPP-B-621, nailed wood box.
PPP-B-621, Class 1, nailed wood box, domestic.
PPP-B-621, Class 2, nailed wood box, overseas.
PPP-B-676, setup box.
PPP-B-1672, Type I, vertical star cushioning in reusable box.
PPP-B-1672, Type II, folding convoluted cushioning in reusable box.
PPP-B-1672, Type III, telescoping encapsulated cushioning in reusable box.
PPP-B-1672, Type IV, horizontal star cushioning in reusable box.
PPP-C-96, metal can.
PPP-D-723, Type I, domestic fiber drum.
PPP-D-723, Type II, overseas fiber drum.
166
Code
AC
AN
AH
AC
AA
DJ
RF
DA
RD
RE
FD
FG
FF
F6
FJ
EZ
FA
FB
FC
DE
NR
NS
NV
NW
HA
CG
CH
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
sequence (see J.4.9 and J.4.12) Continued.
Specification
PPP-D-729, drum, steel, 55 gal.
PPP-T-495, mailing and filing tube.
MIL-C-104, wood crate, lumber and plywood sheathed, nailed or bolted.
MIL-C-104, Type I, Class 1, nailed wood crate, lumber sheathed.
MIL-C-104, Type I, Class 2, nailed wood crate, plywood sheathed.
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 1, bolted wood crate, lumber sheathed.
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 2, bolted wood crate, plywood sheathed.
MIL-C-104, Type II, Class 1 or 2, bolted wood crate, provided with lifting
attachments and an inspection port (Method 54 packages only). The top, one
side and one end of the crate shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER
USE FOR RETURN OR NRFI ASSEMBLY" with black letters a minimum of
2" high.
MIL-B-117, bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class A, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, electrostatic
protective, transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class B, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class B, Style 3, heavy duty, waterproof, one side opaque,
other side transparent bag.
opaque bag.
transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class C, Style 3, heavy duty, waterproof, greaseproof, one
side opaque, other side transparent bag.
opaque bag.
transparent bag.
one side opaque, other side transparent bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class F, Style 1, heavy duty, watervaporproof, electrostatic
protective, opaque bag.
MIL-B-117, Type I, Class H, Style 2, heavy duty, waterproof, electrostatic
protective, electrostatic shielding
167
Code
RG
WM
MA
MB
MF
MC
MG
MH
BD
BB
BL
B1
BE
SD
B2
BS
SE
B3
B9
SG
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Specification
MIL-B-117, Type II, Class C, Style 1, medium duty, waterproof, greaseproof,
opaque bag.
MIL-B-117, Type III, Class E, Style 1, light duty, watervaporproof, greaseproof,
opaque bag.
MIL-B-2427, ammunition box, nailed wood.
MIL-C-3774, open wood crate.
MIL-D-6054, metal drum. reusable.
MIL-D-6055, metal drum, reusable (capacity from 88 to 510 cu. in.)
MIL-PRF-11264, reusable wood containers, heavy duty.
MIL-B-22020, bag, transparent, heat sealable, VCI treated.
MIL-B-26195, wood-cleated skidded box, load bearing base.
MIL-B-26195, Type I, domestic wood-cleated skidded box.
MIL-B-26195, Type II, overseas wood-cleated skidded box.
MIL-B-26195, Type I or II, Style A or B, Class 1 or 2. Provide box with
inspection door located for clear reading of the humidity indicator for Method
54 packages only. The inspection door shall be hinged, cleated and sealed
(similar to inspection door specified by MIL-C-104). The top, one side and one
end of the shipping container shall be marked "REUSABLE CONTAINER
USE FOR RETURN OF NRFI ASSEMBLY" in black letters, minimum 2"
high.
MIL-B-46506, ammunition box, wirebound wood.
MIL-P-81997, cushioned pouch, electrostatic protective, transparent.
ASTM-D5118, fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, corrugated fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, single wall, corrugated fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class domestic, double wall, corrugated fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, corrugated fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, single wall, corrugated
fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type CF, Class weather resistant, double wall, corrugated
fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5118, Type SF, Class domestic, solid fiberboard box.
168
Code
BV
SF
RH
MJ
KE
KF
RK
BT
FU
FV
FW
GB
RJ
SG
E5
EC
E7
E8
ED
EE
NO
EN
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Specification
ASTM-D5118, Type SF, Class weather resistant, solid fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5168, triple wall fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5168, Class 1, non-weather resistant triple wall fiberboard box.
ASTM-D5168, Class 2, weather-resistant triple wall fiberboard box.
ASTM-D6039, open and covered wood crate.
ASTM-D6039, open and covered wood crate, light duty.
ASTM-D6251, wood-cleated panelboard box.
ASTM-D6251, Class 1, domestic wood-cleated panelboard box.
ASTM-D6251, Class 2, overseas wood-cleated panelboard box.
169
Code
EP
DP
DQ
DR
MV
MX
FK
FL
FM
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.VIII. Unit container level codes (see J.4.10).
Code
O
Unit container level

Unit container is not an acceptable shipping container.
Unit container provides level A packing protection.
Unit container provides level B packing protection.
No container is required.
Unit container provides minimal packing protection (see 5.4).
Unit container requires special consideration (air only, inside storage only, etc.)
170
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.VIIIa. Optional procedure indicator codes (see J.4.10).
Code
A
Optional procedure indicator

Packaging is in accordance with a procedural specification or a SPI. The appropriate
specification number will be shown in-the-clear in the supplemental data area.
Certain options can be exercised as to specific method of preservation or DoD

approved packaging materials, but only as indicated in supplemental data. However,
basic preservation method shall be retained and unit package dimensions shall not be
increased by more than one inch. Equal or better protection shall be given the item
and there shall be no increase in the package cost.
For other than SPI items, optional use of flexible polyurethane foam-in-place
cushioning is permitted. Cushioning shall conform to MIL-F-83671, Class 2, grade B.
If F-I-P requires a larger container than conventional packaging would require, the FI-P container requirements will be coded in place of the conventional data.
All packaging data is mandatory for compliance and no substitutions are permitted.
Fast packs should be included in this category.
Options can be exercised as to specific method of preservation or DoD approved

packaging materials to be used. However, basic preservation method shall be
retained, supplemental data shall be complied with, and unit package dimensions shall
not be increased by more than one inch. Equal or better protection shall be given the
item and there shall be no increase in the package cost.
For SPI items, polyurethane foam-in-place is permitted as specified on the SPI only
when the SPI pack is not available.
For other than SPI items, optional use of rigid polyurethane foam-in-place cushioning
is permitted. Cushioning shall conform to MIL-F-83671, Class 1. If F-I-P requires a
larger container than conventional packaging would require, the F-I-P container
requirements will be coded in place of the conventional data.
171
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.IX. Military packing requirement codes (see J.4.13).
Code
A
Requirement
Packing shall be accomplished using fiberboard boxes, weather resistant class,
fabricated in accordance with ASTM-D5118, or triplewall, corrugated fiberboard
boxes, Class 2, conforming to ASTM-D5168.
Packing shall be accomplished using Class 2, overseas wood cleated panelboard

boxes, conforming to ASTM-D6251, or wirebound wood boxes conforming to
PPP-B-585, Class 3.
Packing shall be accomplished using cleated-plywood wood boxes conforming to

PPP-B-601, Grade A, or nailed and lock-corner wood boxes conforming to
PPP-B-621, Class 2 or covered wood crates conforming to ASTM-D6039, or lumber
and plywood sheathed wood crates conforming to MIL-C-104, or load-bearing base
skidded wood-cleated boxes conforming to MIL-B-26195, Type II.
Packing shall be accomplished using open wood crates conforming to MIL-C-3774,

or open wood crates conforming to ASTM-D6039.
Packing shall be accomplished to met the performance test requirements of ASTMD4169, Distribution Cycle 18, Assurance Level 1.
Packing is not required: the unit container shall also serve as the shipping container.
Closure, sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with applicable specification
for shipping container.
Packing shall be accomplished using boxes fabricated in accordance with ASTMD5118, class weather-resistant. When size and weight limitations are exceeded, a
suitable container shall be selected from table C.II.
Packing shall be accomplished using Class 1, domestic wood cleated panelboard

boxes conforming to ASTM-D6251 or wirebound wood boxes conforming to PPP-B585, Class 1, or loadbearing base, skidded, wood-cleated boxes conforming to
MIL-B-26195, Type I.
172
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.IX. Military packing requirement codes (see J.4.13) Continued.
Code
N
Requirement
Packing shall be accomplished using cleated plywood wood boxes, domestic type,
conforming to PPP-B-601, or nailed and lockcorner wood boxes conforming to
PPP-B-621, Class 1, or covered wood crates, domestic class, conforming to
ASTM-D6039, Style B, or nailed and bolted sheathed, lumber and plywood, wood
crates, non-weather resistant/domestic class conforming to MIL-C-104.
Packing shall be accomplished using open wood crates conforming to ASTM-D6039,

Style B, or open wood crates, nonweather resistant, domestic class, conforming to
MIL-C-3774.
Packing shall be accomplished in accordance with table C.II for the packing level
specified. Closure sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with applicable
specification for shipping container.
Packing shall be accomplished to meet the performance test requirements of ASTMD4169, Distribution Cycle 18, Assurance Level 2.
Packing shall be accomplished by use of fiberboard containers fabricated in

accordance with ASTM-D5118, weather-resistant class, or ASTM-D5168, Class 2; or
whenever practicable, by means of shrink-film conforming to A-A-3174.
Special requirement. See specific instructions or drawings provided.
Packing shall be accomplished using cleated-plywood boxes, overseas type,

conforming to PPP-B-601 or nailed wood boxes conforming to PPP-B-621, Class 2,
Style 4.
See method of preservation.
Packing shall be accomplished using cleated-plywood boxes, domestic type,

conforming to PPP-B-601 or nailed wood boxes conforming to PPP-B-621, Class 1,
Style 4.
173
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.IX. Military packing requirement codes (see J.4.13) Continued.
Code
7
0/
Requirement
Packing shall be accomplished using cleated-plywood boxes, domestic type,
conforming to PPP-B-601, or nailed wood boxes conforming to PPP-B-621, Class 1,
Style 4, or wirebound wood boxes conforming to PPP-B-585, Class 3, Style 2 or 3,
or fiberboard boxes conforming to ASTM-D5168, Class 2, Style E.
Packing not authorized.
174
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.IXa. Minimal packing requirement codes (see J.4.13).
Code
F
Requirement
Packing is not required; the unit container shall also serve as the shipping container.
Closure, sealing and reinforcement shall be in accordance with applicable
specification for shipping container.
Packing shall be accomplished using fiberboard boxes fabricated in accordance with

ASTM-D5118, Class domestic or ASTM-D5168, Class 1.
Items or packages that require packing for acceptance by the carrier shall be packed
in exterior type shipping containers in a manner that will ensure safe transportation at
the lowest rate to the point of delivery and shall meet, as a minimum, the
requirements of the following rules and regulations, as applicable to the mode(s) of
transportation to be utilized:
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
(f)
(g)
(h)
Postal Regulations
Department of Transportation Regulations
Civil Air Regulations
Uniform Freight Classification Rules
National Motor Freight Classification Rules
American Truckers' Association Rules
Other applicable carriers' rules
Military Air Regulations for dangerous materials
Dangerous goods shall be prepared for shipment according to applicable Department

of Transportation (DOT) regulations and international regulations in effect at time of
shipment.
Shipments by parcel post must comply with Postal Regulations.
6
Packing shall be accomplished to meet the performance test requirements of ASTMD4169, Distribution Cycle 18, Assurance Level 3.
0/
Packing not authorized.
175
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.X. Special marking codes (see J.4.14).
Code
ZZ
0/1
0/2
0/3
0/4
0/5
0/6
0/7
0/8
0/9
10/
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20/
21
23
24
Explanation of code
Special requirements
Fragile
Arrow up
Method 50
Fragile, Arrow up and Method 50
Delicate instrument
Delicate instrument and Arrow up
Glass do not drop
Keep dry
Perishable keep frozen
Keep at 40 degrees temperature
Sling point
Fragile, Method 50
Open this side
Center of balance
Use no hooks
Top
Reusable container
Remove top first
Method 50 reusable container
Do not bend
Do not sling
Perishable biologicals, do not freeze
Open for inspection or use only
Code
25
26
28
29
30/
31
32
33
34
36
37
39
40/
51
52
60/
0/0/
176
Explanation of code
Box _____ of _____
Load bearing area
Do not drop or throw
Do not hump
Top heavy
Center of gravity
Type I, shelf life
Type II, shelf life
Manufacturer's part number
Fragile, arrow up, and glass
Fragile, arrow up
ESD sensitive electronic device
requirements of MIL-STD-129
apply
Omission of marking for sensitive,
controlled or pilferable items per
MIL-STD-129
Marking shall be accomplished in
accordance with the marking
requirements in the applicable
procedural packaging specification
Hardness critical
Asbestos Warning Label
No special marking
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.XI. Document number to table and code cross-reference index.
Document No.
A-A-160
Table
J.VII
AC
Code
A-A-203
J.IV
CA
A-A-550
J.VII
AN
A-A-881
J.VII
AH
A-A-1051
J.V
DA
A-A-1249
J.IV
DA
A-A-1507
J.V
HA, HB, HD
A-A-1588
J.VII
AC
A-A-1898
J.Ia
J.V
KD
BG
A-A-2714
J.VII
AA
A-A-2807
J.VII
D2, D3, DJ
A-A-3129
J.Ia
J.V
DB, DC, GX
NA, NB, NG
A-A-3174
J.Ia
J.IV
J.IX
DB, DC
JA
T
A-A-50177
J.IV
LA
A-A-55057
J.V
LP
A-A-59135
J.Ia
GX
177
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
TABLE J.XI. Document number to table and code cross-reference index - Continued
Document No.
A-A-59136
Table
J.V
J.VII
GA, NA
PK
Code
QQ-A-1876
J.IV
BA
VV-L-800
J.Ia
J.III
KD
0/9
MMM-A-260
J.Ia
AW
PPP-B-26
J.VII
RF
PPP-B-566
J.VII
D1, D2, D3, DA, E9
PPP-B-585
J.VII
J.IX
RD, RE
B, M, 7
PPP-B-601
J.Ia
J.VII
J.IX
JM
EZ, F2, F3, F6, F7, FD, FF, FG, FJ, PK
C, N, 2, 5, 7
PPP-B-621
J.VII
J.IX
F2, F3, F7, F9, FA, FB, FC, PK

C, N, 2, 5, 7
PPP-B-676
J.VII
D1, D2, D3, DE, E9
PPP-B-1055
J.Ia
AW
PPP-B-1672
J.VII
NR, NS, NV, NW
PPP-C-96
J.VII
HA
PPP-C-795
J.Ia
DB, DC, GX
LC, LT, NA
178
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Document No.
PPP-C-850
Table
J.V
J.VII
BN
PK
Code
PPP-C-1120
J.V
J.VII
FA, FE, FH, FL

PK
PPP-C-1797
J.Ia
J.V
GX
GT, NA, NB
PPP-D-723
J.VII
CG, CH
PPP-D-729
J.VII
RG
PPP-T-495
J.VII
WM
MIL-C-104
J.VII
J.IX
F7, GB, MA, MB, MC, MF, MG, MH

C, N
MIL-B-117
J.Ia
J.VII
AW, DC, GS, GX

A1, B1, B2, B3, B8, B9, BD, BE, BL, BS, BV,
SD, SE, SF, SG
MIL-B-121
J.Ia
J.IV
J.VII
AU, BC, DR, EK, KF

GB, GC, GH
A1
MIL-P-130
J.IV
J.VII
FA
A1
MIL-PRF-131
J.Ia
DW
MIL-P-149
J.Ia
J.III
KF
38
MIL-B-2427
J.VII
RH
179
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Document No.
MIL-PRF-3150
Table
J.III
0/7
Code
MIL-PRF-3420
J.IV
MB
MIL-C-3774
J.VII
J.IX
MJ
D, P
MIL-D-6054
J.VII
K1, KE
MIL-D-6055
J.VII
K1, KF
MIL-PRF-6081
J.III
51
MIL-PRF-6085
J.III
17
MIL-C-6529
J.III
31, 32
MIL-PRF-7808
J.III
33
MIL-PRF-7870
J.III
50/
MIL-PRF-8188
J.III
52
MIL-PRF-10924
J.III
13
MIL-PRF-11264
J.VII
RK
MIL-C-11796
J.Ia
J.III
DR
0/6
MIL-PRF-16173
J.Ia
J.III
AH, AU, BC, DR

0/1, 0/2, 0/3, 19, 21
MIL-C-16555
J.III
27, 28, 29
180
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Document No.
MIL-P-17667
Table
J.IV
J.VII
EA, EB, EC
A1
Code
MIL-P-19644
J.V
GC, NS
MIL-PRF-20092
J.V
J.VII
DH
PK
MIL-PRF-21260
J.III
10/, 57, 58, 59
MIL-PRF-22019
J.Ia
J.IV
GS
JL
MIL-B-22020
J.Ia
J.VII
GS, KD
BT
MIL-PRF-22191
J.Ia
J.IV
DB, DC
JV
MIL-PRF-23699
J.III
56
MIL-PRF-23827
J.III
11
MIL-C-25537
J.III
43
MIL-B-26195
J.VII
J.IX
FU, FV, FW, GB

C, M
MIL-PRF-26514
J.V
J.VII
GD, GE, GF, GH, LE, NS

PK
MIL-L-46002
J.III
20/
MIL-L-46010
J.III
30/
181
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Document No.
MIL-H-46170
Table
J.III
15
Code
MIL-B-46176
J.III
79
MIL-B-46506
J.VII
RJ
MIL-P-53030
J.III
80/
MIL-PRF-81322
J.III
12
MIL-PRF-81705
J.Ia
J.IV
GX
K3, N9
MIL-P-81997
J.Ia
J.V
GX
P4
MIL-PRF-83282
J.III
65
MIL-PRF-83671
J.V
J.VIIIa
MA, MB, MD
F, R
MIL-STD-129
J.Ia
J.X
GC, GS, GX
39, 40/
MIL-STD-1186
J.V
AD
ASTM-D4169
J.IX
J.IXa
E, R
6
ASTM-D4727
J.Ia
J.V
JF, JM, KD
JA, JB, JC, NS
ASTM-D5118
J.Ia
J.VII
J.IX
J.IXa
DR, DW, KD
D3, E5, E7, E8, E9, EC, ED, EE, EN, EP, KA,
NO
A, H, T
L
182
MIL-STD-2073-1D
APPENDIX J
Document No.
ASTM-D5168
Table
J.VII
J.IX
J.IXa
DP, DQ, DR, PK

A, 7
L
Code
ASTM-D5486
J.Ia
AU, AW, DR
ASTM-D6039
J.VII
J.IX
MV, MX
C, D, N, P
ASTM-D6251
J.VII
J.IX
FK, FL, FM
B, M
NAS847
J.Ia
DR
SAE-J1966
J.III
53
183
MIL-STD-2073-1D
INDEX
Subject
Paragraph/Table/Figure
Page
Acquisition requirements ..........................................6.1.................................................... 24

Ammunition unit load test requirements....................F.3.3................................................. 121
Approval of packaging data......................................E.6 ................................................... 104
Barriers (size calculations)........................................Table A.V ........................................ 57
Categorization (also see Packaging
Categorization)...................................................A.5.3................................................ 36
Fragility, weight and size category ......................Table A.II......................................... 47
Physical and chemical characteristics
category .......................................................Table A.I.......................................... 41
Preservative category .........................................Table A.III ....................................... 48
Category codes ........................................................A.5.3.2 ............................................. 37
First category physical/chemical.......................A.5.3.2.1 .......................................... 37
Second category weight/size/fragility ...............A.5.3.2.2 .......................................... 38
Third category preservatives............................A.5.3.2.3 .......................................... 38
Changes from previous issue ....................................6.9.................................................... 27
Classified material requirements................................4.4.................................................... 11
Cleaning codes .........................................................Table J.II.......................................... 149
Code sequence format ..............................................Figure A.1 ........................................ 40
Codes.......................................................................Appendix J ....................................... 132
Common items (also see Packaging Common
Items).................................................................3.3.................................................... 6
Container Design Retrieval System...........................3.5.................................................... 6
C.5.1.2 ............................................. 73
Appendix H...................................... 129
Containers
Exterior..............................................................C.4.2 ................................................ 72
Fiberboard container sizes ..................................Table C.III ....................................... 81
Interior ...............................................................C.4.1 ................................................ 72
Intermediate container codes ..............................Table J.VII ....................................... 160
Intermediate container quantities ........................B.5 ................................................... 67
Intermediate container requirements ...................5.3.1................................................. 22
184
MIL-STD-2073-1D
INDEX (continued)
Subject
Page
Multiapplication .................................................C.5.2 ................................................ 73

Availability ...................................................C.5.2.7 ............................................. 76
Design and selection .....................................C.5.2.1 ............................................. 73
Identification of ............................................C.5.2.2 ............................................. 73
Packaging design validation ..........................C.5.2.4 ............................................. 74
Selection of ..................................................Table C.IV ....................................... 83
Types of .......................................................C.5.2.5 ............................................. 74
C.5.2.6 ............................................. 75
Ordnance............................................................C.5.1.3 ............................................. 73
Reusable.............................................................3.16.................................................. 9
C.5 ................................................... 73
Long life.......................................................C.5.2.6 ............................................. 75
Multiapplication............................................C.5.2.7 ............................................. 76
Short life.......................................................C.5.2.5 ............................................. 74
Specialized ...................................................C.5.1 ................................................ 73
Selection of exterior containers...........................C.4.2 ................................................ 72
Table C.II......................................... 78
Selection of interior containers ...........................C.4.1 ................................................ 72
Table C.I .......................................... 77
Shipping .............................................................Appendix C ...................................... 69
Specially designed ..............................................C.5.1 ................................................ 73
Unit
Codes ...........................................................Table J.VII ....................................... 160
Size of ..........................................................C.3.1 ................................................ 72
Use of...........................................................C.3.2 ................................................ 72
Weight and size calculations ...............................Table A.V ........................................ 57
Contractual requirements..........................................6.1.................................................... 24
Critical items ............................................................3.6.................................................... 6
Critical surface/application criteria............................A.5.3.2.1.2 ....................................... 37
Cushioning material codes ........................................Table J.V.......................................... 156
Cushioning weight and size calculations....................Table A.V ........................................ 57
Data .........................................................................Appendix E ...................................... 96
Approval ............................................................E.6 ................................................... 104
Forms.................................................................Figure E.1 ........................................ 116
Requirements .....................................................6.3.................................................... 24
Transmittal .........................................................E.6.2 ................................................ 106
185
MIL-STD-2073-1D
INDEX (continued)
Subject
Page
Definitions................................................................3....................................................... 6
Desiccant quantity calculations .................................5.2.3.7.b ........................................... 19
Design validation provisions .....................................Appendix F....................................... 119
Disassembly of items for preservation.......................5.2.4.2.............................................. 21
Drying processes ......................................................5.2.1................................................. 12
Electrostatic discharge sensitive items ......................5.2.4.1.............................................. 21
Equipment mounts ...................................................5.2.4.6.............................................. 22
Excess and residual material .....................................4.8.................................................... 11
Exterior container selection ......................................Table C.II......................................... 78
Exterior containers ...................................................C.4.2 ................................................ 72
Fiberboard container standard sizes ..........................Table C.III ....................................... 81
Formulas for weight and size
calculations.........................................................A.8................................................... 39
Fragility factors ........................................................3.8.................................................... 7
Approximate values............................................Table I.............................................. 28
Determination.....................................................4.11.................................................. 12
Fragility, weight and size category
codes..................................................................Table A.II......................................... 47
Hazardous material...................................................3.9.................................................... 7
4.3.................................................... 11
Authentication of SPIs for ..................................E.6.1.5.1 .......................................... 105
Shipping .............................................................A.4.1 ................................................ 35
Testing ...............................................................F.3.2................................................. 121
Inspection ................................................................Appendix G...................................... 122
Intermediate container
Quantities...........................................................B.5.1 ................................................ 67
Requirements .....................................................5.3.1................................................. 22
Interior containers ....................................................C.4.1 ................................................ 65
Item characteristics...................................................A.5.2................................................ 36
Item identification data.............................................E.4.2.4 ............................................. 99
Table E.I .......................................... 107
186
MIL-STD-2073-1D
INDEX (continued)
Subject
Page
Kits ..........................................................................Appendix D...................................... 93

Consolidation of different items ..........................D.3.1................................................ 93
Preservation .......................................................D.3................................................... 93
Requirements .....................................................4.6.................................................... 11
SPI preparation ..................................................E.3.2.5 ............................................. 97
Unit preservation................................................D.4................................................... 94
Levels of protection .................................................3.10.................................................. 7
Load types ...............................................................3.11.................................................. 8
Loose fill material.....................................................4.9.................................................... 11
Marking for shipment ...............................................5.5.................................................... 23
Materials, new packaging .........................................4.12.................................................. 12
Methods of preservation...........................................5.2.3................................................. 13
Multiapplication containers.......................................C.5.2 ................................................ 73
New packaging materials..........................................4.12.................................................. 12
Ordnance containers.................................................C.5.1.3 ............................................. 73
Packaging ................................................................Appendix A ...................................... 30
Categorization....................................................A.5.3................................................ 36
Predetermined data .......................................A.5.4................................................ 38
Code sequence ...................................................Figure A.1 ........................................ 40
Codes.................................................................Appendix J ....................................... 137
Common items ...................................................A.5.4................................................ 38
Coded data (predetermined)..........................Table A.IV ....................................... 53
Design validation ..........................................A.8................................................... 39
Data and data form requirements ........................E.3 ................................................... 96
Approval of contractor developed data .........E.6 ................................................... 104
Development of packaging data ....................E.4.1 ................................................ 97
Item Identification Data ................................E.4.2.4 ............................................. 99
Preservation and packing data.......................E.4.2.5 ............................................. 99
Preservation and packing data form ..............Figure E.1 ........................................ 116
Recording data .............................................E.3.2 ................................................ 97
SPI data........................................................E.4.2.7 ............................................. 99
187
MIL-STD-2073-1D
INDEX (continued)
Subject
Page
SPI form.......................................................Figure E.2 ........................................ 117

Supplemental data.........................................E.4.2.6 ............................................. 99
Transmittal of data........................................E.6.2 ................................................ 106
Design validation provisions ...............................Appendix F....................................... 119
Applicability of tests .....................................F.3.1................................................. 121
Common items..............................................A.8.1................................................ 39
Multiplication containers...............................C.5.2.4 ............................................. 74
Selective items..............................................A.8.2................................................ 39
Special items.................................................A.8.2................................................ 39
Formulas for weight and size calculations ...........A.7................................................... 39
Table A.V ........................................ 57
Inspection provisions..........................................Appendix G...................................... 122
Methods selection...............................................4.1.................................................... 10
Selective items....................................................A.5.1................................................ 35
Special items ......................................................A.5.1................................................ 35
Special Packaging Instruction (SPI)....................E.3.2.5 ............................................. 97
Specifications .....................................................A.3................................................... 35
Tests (also see Packaging Design Validation
Provisions and Quality Assurance
Provisions) ...................................................Appendix F....................................... 119
Appendix G...................................... 122
Packing ....................................................................5.3.................................................... 22
Container selection .............................................5.3.2.1.............................................. 23
Intermediate containers.......................................5.3.1................................................. 22
Military requirements..........................................5.3.................................................... 22
Minimal requirements .........................................5.4.................................................... 23
Physical and chemical characteristics codes...............Table A.I.......................................... 41
Predetermined packaging codes................................A.5.4................................................ 38
Preservation inspection.............................................G.4................................................... 123
Kits ....................................................................D.4................................................... 94
Levels of protection............................................3.10.................................................. 7
Requirements .....................................................5.2.................................................... 12
Preservative category code.......................................Table A.III ....................................... 48
Preservative codes....................................................Table J.III......................................... 150
Preservatives ............................................................5.2.2................................................. 12
Application.........................................................5.2.2.2.............................................. 12
Selection ............................................................5.2.2.1.............................................. 12
188
MIL-STD-2073-1D
INDEX (continued)
Subject
Page
Procedural packaging specifications..........................A.3................................................... 35

Table A.VI ....................................... 60
E.4.1.1 ............................................. 98
Prototype pack.........................................................3.13.................................................. 9
Quality assurance provisions.....................................5.7.................................................... 24
Quality assurance tests .............................................G.4................................................... 123
Quality system..........................................................G.3.1................................................ 123
Quantity per Unit Pack (QUP)..................................Appendix B ...................................... 62
Determination.....................................................B.3 ................................................... 62
Factors and formulae ..........................................B.3.8 ................................................ 63
Formula A..........................................................B.3.8.1 ............................................. 63
Formula B ..........................................................B.3.8.2 ............................................. 63
Repairable assemblies ...............................................4.8.................................................... 11
Residual excess material ...........................................4.8.................................................... 11
Rough handling tests (also see Testing) ....................F.4.1................................................. 121
Rubber items ............................................................5.2.4.7.............................................. 22
Selective group items (also see Packaging
Selective Items)..................................................A.5.1................................................ 35
Sizes of fiberboard containers...................................Table C.III ....................................... 81
Skin packaging (kits)................................................D.4.3................................................ 94
Special group items (also see Packaging
Special Items).....................................................A.5.1................................................ 35
Special Packaging Instructions (SPI) ........................E.3.2.5 ............................................. 97
Data ...................................................................E.4.2.7 ............................................. 99
Preparation of.....................................................E.5 ................................................... 99
Reproduction of .................................................E.6.2.2 ............................................. 106
Specially designed containers....................................C.5.1 ................................................ 73
Standard sizes of fiberboard containers.....................Table C.III ....................................... 81
Supersession ............................................................6.8.................................................... 27
Supplemental data ....................................................E.4.2.6 ............................................. 99
189
MIL-STD-2073-1D
INDEX (continued)
Subject
Page
TestingAppendix F...................................................119
Design validation tests (also see Packaging
Design Validation Provisions) .......................Appendix F....................................... 119
Preservation tests ...............................................G.4................................................... 123
Quality assurance................................................G.4................................................... 123
Rough handling ..................................................F.4.1................................................. 121
Transmittal of packaging data...................................E.6.2 ................................................ 106
Unit container weight and size formulas....................Table A.V ........................................ 57
Volatile corrosion inhibitors, use criteria...................5.2.2.3.............................................. 13
Weight and size category codes................................Table A.II......................................... 47
Weight and size formulas..........................................Table A.V ........................................ 57
Wheeled items..........................................................5.2.4.4.............................................. 22
Wrap weight and size calculations ............................Table A.V ........................................ 57
Wrapping material codes ..........................................Table J.IV ........................................ 154
Custodians:
Army SM
Navy AS
Air Force 69
DLA DH
Preparing activity:
Navy AS
(Project PACK-1100)
Review activities:
Army AL, AR, AT, AV, CR3, EA, GL3, MI, MT
Navy CG, EC, MC, OS, SA, SH,YD
Air Force 10, 11, 13, 18, 19, 99
DLA CC, CT, DM, GS, IS, LS, SS
190
STANDARDIZATION DOCUMENT IMPROVEMENT PROPOSAL

INSTRUCTIONS
1. The preparing activity must complete blocks 1, 2, 3, and 8. In block 1, both the document number and revision letter
should be given.
2. The submitter of this form must complete blocks 4, 5, 6, and 7, and send to preparing activity.
3. The preparing activity must provide a reply within 30 days from receipt of the form.
NOTE: This form may not be used to request copies of documents, nor to request waivers, or clarification of
requirements on current contracts. Comments submitted on this form do not constitute or imply authorization to waive
any portion of the referenced document(s) or to amend contractual requirements.
I RECOMMEND A CHANGE:
2. DOCUMENT DATE (YYYYMMDD)

19991215
1. DOCUMENT NUMBER
MIL-STD-2073-1D
3. DOCUMENT TITLE
STANDARD PRACTICE FOR MILITARY PACKAGING
4. NATURE OF CHANGE (Identify paragraph number and include proposed rewrite, if possible. Attach extra sheets as needed.)
5. REASON FOR RECOMMENDATION
6. SUBMITTER
a. NAME (Last, First, Middle Initial)
c. ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code)
b. ORGANIZATION
d. TELEPHONE (Include Area Code)
(1) Commercial
7. DATE SUBMITTED
(YYYYMMDD)
(2) DSN
(If applicable)
8. PREPARING ACTIVITY
a. NAME
COMMANDER
NAVAL AIR WARFARE CENTER
AIRCRAFT DIVISION
b. TELEPHONE (Include Area Code)

(1) Commercial
(732) 323-4282
c. ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code)

CODE 435E B562-3
HIGHWAY 547
LAKEHURST, NJ 08733-5049
IF YOU DO NOT RECEIVE A REPLY WITHIN 45 DAYS, CONTACT:

Defense Standardization Program Office (DLSC-LM)
8725 John J. Kingman Road, Suite 2533
Fort Belvoir, Virginia 22060-6221
Telephone (703) 767-6888 DSN 427-6888
DD Form 1426, FEB 1999 (EG)
PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE.
(2) DSN
624-4282
WHS/DIOR, Feb 99
MIL-STD-2073-1D
192

Standard Practice For Military Packaging

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Practice For Military Packaging

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Standard Practice For Military Packaging

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose and scope of this standard?

What is the purpose and scope of this standard?

What types of items does this standard apply to?

What types of items does this standard apply to?

NOT MEASUREMENT

THIS PAGE IS INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................3

GENERAL MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS...................10

DETAILED MILITARY PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS .................12

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................30

USE OF EXISTING PACKAGING REQUIREMENTS ........................35

HAZARDOUS MATERIAL ..................................................................35

MILITARY PACKAGING CODE DEVELOPMENT ...........................35

CONTAINER SELECTION ..................................................................39

PACKAGING DESIGN VALIDATION................................................39

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................62

QUANTITY PER UNIT PACK DETERMINATION FORMULAE ......65

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................69

REUSABLE CONTAINERS .................................................................73

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................93

PACKING AND MARKING OF KITS..................................................95

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................96

DETAILED REQUIREMENTS ............................................................97

PREPARATION OF SPECIAL PACKAGING INSTRUCTION (SPI) ..99

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................119

TEST METHODS .................................................................................121

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................122

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................129

DETAILED REQUIREMENTS ............................................................129

APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ..............................................................132

DETAILED REQUIREMENTS ............................................................139

Items expected to enter the military distribution system

Items delivered during wartime

Items requiring reusable containers

Items intended for delivery-at-sea

Items intended for immediate use

Items for not-mission-capable supply

Items intended for depot operational consumption

Small parcel shipments (CONUS), not-for-stock

Direct vendor deliveries (CONUS)

Is item entering the *

Package and ship IAW

Package IAW A.4

Is item fragility factor

Is item fragility factor equal

Are item weight &

Categorize IAW Appendix A

Can item packaging be

Select Appendix J codes and

Is specialized long life

Interrogate Container Design

Is CDRS response positive?

Use design "AS IS" or

Are item weight

Design package using

Will 100 trip long life

Use 100 trip long life

Select Appendix J codes